Course Specifications | 1st Semester | Page

Transcription

COURSE SPECIFICATIONS
Following are the specifications for all the courses taught in Dentistry listed according to each
semester in which they are taught.
1 S T SEMESTER
FIRST YEAR [PRE DENTAL]
FIRST SEMESTER
CODE
COURSE TITLE
TH
PR
CRH
163 PRE
161 PRE
108 PRE
102 PRE
101 ARAB
English Language I
Medical Physics I
Medical Chemistry I
Medical Biology I
Arabic Language Skills
0
2
2
2
0
3
3
3
3
2
Introduction to computer
15
2
2
2
2
TOTAL
6
25
8
17
101 COM
Course Specifications | 1st Semester | Page - 1
2
2
3
COH
P-REQ
2 N D SEMESTER
FIRST YEAR [PRE DENTAL]
SECOND SEMESTER
CODE
COURSE TITLE
TH
PR
CRH
164 PRE
162 PRE
109 PRE
106 PRE
105 PRE
101 ISLM
English Language II
Medical Physics II
Medical Chemistry II
Medical Biology II
Study Skills
Islamic Culture I
15
2
2
3
1
2
0
2
2
2
0
0
3
3
3
4
1
2
TOTAL
6
25
Course Specifications | 2nd Semester | Page - 2
6
16
COH
P-REQ
163 PRE
161 PRE
108 PRE
102 PRE
3 R D SEMESTER
SECOND YEAR
CODE
221 RDS
223 RDS
251 DMS
253 DMS
255 DMS
261 DEN
102 ARAB
102 ISLM
TOTAL
COURSE TITLE
Basic Dental
Biomaterials
Dental Anatomy &
Occlusion I
Gross Anatomy &
Histology I
THIRD SEMESTER
TH
PR
Introduction to Dental
profession, Behavioural
Sciences & Ethics
Arabic Writing
Islamic Culture II
8
1
162 PRE
1
3
6
5
0
2
0
0
12
2
2
18
2
1
2
2
14
Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Page - 3
P-REQ
0
2
Biochemistry I
COH
1
1
Physiology I
CRH
3
2
3
3
0
1
4
9
5
2
1
2
2
26
106 PRE,
162 PRE
106 PRE,
109 PRE
106 PRE,
109 PRE
106 PRE,
109 PRE
BASIC DENTAL BIOMATERIALS
1. Institution:
2. College:
A. Course identification and general information
a. Course title and code
b. Credit hours
Jazan University
College of Dentistry
Basic Dental Biomaterials
221 RDS
c. Program in which course offered
Dentistry
e. Year / Semester at which course offered
2nd year / 3rd Semester
d. Name of the faculty member responsible for course
f. Pre-requisites for the course
g. Co-requisite for the course
h. Location if not main campus
Jazan University
162 PRE
--
Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives
By the end of the course the student should have:




Basic knowledge on chemical and physical concepts.
Knowledge of the behavior of biomaterials within the mouth.
Insight into some of dental materials which could be useful for dental treatments. For every
one of those materials, chemical and physical reactions in processing, the most important
material-technical indications, procedure of use and indications have to be known.
Knowledge of the techniques required to control the materials properties in order to
communicate more effectively with dental laboratory technicians.
C. Course description
Physical, mechanical, chemical, and biological behavior of a variety of dental materials will be
covered in this program. Basic dental biomaterial course serves as foundation course in
dentistry, which particularly deals in restoration and treatment of teeth. In this course, the
physical, mechanical, surface properties of metallic, ceramic, and polymeric materials are
discussed in details.
Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Basic Dental Biomaterials | Page - 4
Jazan University | College of Dentistry | BDS-Curriculum
I. Topic to be covered
Number
weeks
Topic
Contact hours
1. Introduction to materials in dentistry
1
2
3. Mechanical properties
2
4
2. Structure of matters
4. Rheological properties
1
1
5. Physical properties
1
6. Polymers
2
7. Impression materials
5
8. Model and die materials
2
Revision (16th week)
2
2
2
4
10
4
Final exam (17th week)
II. Course Component
Lectures
Component
1. Introduction to
dental materials
- Materials used in dentistry:- ( metals , composite
polymers and ceramic)
2. Structure of
matters
- Types of primary bond:- ( Ionic, metallic, Covalent )
- Important dental terms:- ( prosthesis, crown , bridge,
partial denture , complete denture, ridge, dentulous
ridge ,edentulous ridge, partial edentulous ridge )
- Types of secondary bond:- (dispersion force, polar
force)
- Types of solids:- (crystalline, non- crystalline)
Practical/
Fieldwork/
Internship
3.Mechanical
properties
- Types of stress :- (tensile, compressive, shear ,
complex).
- Types of strain :- ( elastic , plastic)
- Stress strain curve:- ( elongation , rigidity, flexibility,
ductility, malleability, resilience, toughness)
- Other mechanical properties:- (transverse strength,
tear strength, fatigue strength, compressive
properties, impact strength, tensile properties of
brittle materials)
-Surface mechanical properties: (Hardness ,Friction
and Wear)
4. Rheological
properties
- Viscoelasticity, strain/ time curve
- Types of fluids and pastes:- ( Newtonian, dilatant,
pseudoplastic)
--
- Time dependence viscosity: - (working time, setting
time).
5. Physical
Properties
- Creep
- Thermal properties :-( Heat of fusion, thermal
conductivity, specific heat, thermal diffusivity and
coefficient of thermal expansion, exothermic
reaction).
- Optical properties: - (color, pigmentation,
metamerism, fluorescence, opacity, translucency,
transparency, index of refraction).
6. Polymers
- Other properties:- ( water sorption, solubility,
density)
- Basic nature of polymers
-Structure and properties.
- Application of polymers.
-Addition polymerization.
- Condensation polymerization.
- Physical change occurs during polymerization
reaction.
- Plasticizer.
--
- Cross linking.
- Copolymer.
- Glass transition temperature.
7. Impression
materials
- Thermal behavior of polymers.
- Ideal requirement of impression materials.
- Classification of impression materials (non-elastic,
elastic)
- Impression compound.
- Zinc oxide eugenol.
- Hydrocolloid impression (alginate and agar.
- Elastomeric impression (polysulfide, condensation
silicone, addition silicone, polyether).
8. Model and die
materials
- Composition , setting reaction , properties,
applications and recent advances of each impression
material)
- Ideal requirement of model and die materials.
- Gypsum products (Chemical, physical nature, setting
reaction, properties, manipulation and application).
- Copper electroplated die.
-Silver electroplated die.
-Ceramic die.
III. Addition learning hours expected for students- 20 Semester
IV. Development of learning outcomes in Domains
a- knowledge and understanding
At the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:
a.1. Understand deeply the chemical and physical basics essential for handling of the dental
biomaterials.
a.2. Situate the limitations and the durability of every material in an objective dental and
social perspective
a.3. Select the proper material for a specific dental treatment judiciously and in a wellconsidered manner
a.4. Select material from the commercial market independently and critically
b- Intellectual skills
b1 Analyze the problems systematically and solve them.
b2 Distinguish the best innovative dental techniques, materials and tools.
b3 Criticize the scientific studies.
c- Professional and practical skills
c1 Solve the problems that will aid in making appropriate selections of materials for each
patient's unique needs.
c2 Inform the patient correctly, objectively and sufficiently about possible side-effects of the
materials.
d- General and transferable skills
Through group working in research, the dental student will:
d1 Gain the skill of discussing and accepting different opinion.
d2 Use and access a rang of learning resources.
d3 Evaluate his own strength and weakness.
e- Attitude
Through the communication with the staff members, the student will:
e1 Develop ethical characters for good communication generally with people and
specifically with patients.
e2 Have self-confidence.
e3 Have emotional maturity.
e4 Demonstrate ethical relationship with staff.
V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester
Assessment
Task
Proportion
Continues assessment
Midterm
30 %
Written exam
60%
Oral
Summative assessment
10%
D. Students support
Faculty available for individual student consultations as academic advice
Consultations: 2 hours / week
Academic advice: 2 hours / week
E. Learning resources

Course notes, handouts, slides.

Essential text books:
o
o

Craig RG, Power JM. Restorative dental materials. 11th ed. St. Louis, Mosby, 2006.
Phillip's Science of Dental Materials (Anusavice Phillip's Science of dental materials )
by Knneth J. Anusavice. 2003
Recommended text books:
o
o
o
o
McCabe JF. Applied Dental Materials. 7th edition. Blackwell Science, London, 1990.
O’Brien WJ. Dental Materials and Their Selection. 3rd edition. Quintessence, 2002.
Combe EC. Notes on Dental Materials. 6th edition. New York, Chuchill Livingstone,
1992.
Introduction to Dental Materials by Richard van Noort 2007.
F. Facilities required
a. Accommodation
o
o
Lecture room for 40 – 60 students.
Labs for 40- 60 students.
b. Computing resources
o
o
Computers with CD / DVD
Computers with access to internet (PubMed: Medline search in the international
scientific journals).
C. Other resources
o
o
Over head projectors
White board and markers.
G. Course evaluation and improvement processes
a. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:
o
o
o
o
Teacher-student discussion, focus group.
Student's surveys on effectiveness of teaching.
Student's personal written feedbacks.
Teaching appraisal questionnaire.
b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by instructors or by the department:
o
o
o
o
Monitoring student's performance and progress through periodic examination and
assessments and assessments exercises.
Feedback, self-appraisal and department discussion on evaluating the effectiveness
of teaching.
Peer evaluation.
Students and departmental feedbacks.
c. Processes for improvement of teaching:
o
o
o
By identifying and evaluating weak area areas and working on its improvement.
Continuing dental education programs.
Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.
d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:
o
o
o
o
Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examination committee.
Evaluation and assessment of student's exam reports.
Remarking of a sample assignment within the faculty members and faculty from
outside the collage.
Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as a whole.
e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for course:
Review:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Semester and yearly review for student's performance in all teaching fields.
Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferable skills.
Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge from faculty
leaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.
Comparing student's performance benchmarks from other similar institutes and
working on its improvement.
Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs' and requirements.
Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvement strategies.
Provide additional training for staff as and when required.
Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies.
Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in the line with
international standards.
Institution
DENTAL ANATOMY & OCCLUSION I
Jazan University
College/Department :
A Course Identification and General Information
1
Course title and code
Dental Anatomy & Occlusion I,
223 RDS
3
Contact hours
5 contact hours
2
4
Credit hours
Program(s) in which the course is offered
5
Name of faculty member responsible for the course
7
Year at which this course is offered
6
Level at which this course is offered
8
9
Dentistry
Prof.Amel Radwan el Hak
Prof.Naglaa Nagy
3rd Level
Second Year
Pre-requisites for this course
106 PRE, 162 PRE
Location if not on main campus
Al-Shawgra
Co-requisites for this course
10
2 Credit hours (1+1+3)
------
B Objectives
After the completion of the course, the student should have knowledge of the following:










Descriptive terms in human masticatory system and dental anatomy.
Dental formula and notation systems.
Anatomical landmarks of teeth.
Macroscopic structure of the features of the crown and the root of both permanent and
deciduous teeth.
Macroscopic structure of the characteristics of the endodontic space of anterior teeth (pulp
chamber and canal).
Order of eruption of both permanent and deciduous teeth.
Brief microscopic structure of various dental tissues (dentin, enamel, cementum and dental
pulp).
Radiologic anatomy of the teeth and the jaws during different period of dentition, biological
variability, asymmetry of teeth.
Genetic influences on tooth morphology.
Self-protective features of teeth; geometric outlines of both anterior and posterior teeth
A. Plans for developing and improving the course:
Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Dental Anatomy & Occlusion I | Page - 12
1. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching
section of the course every year.
2. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and
level of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demand
this course as prerequisite.
C. Course Description:
Dental Anatomy & Occlusion I is 2 credit hour course that deals with the basics of oral
and facial structures as well as the anatomy and morphology of both permanent and
primary teeth. The course will comprise of lectures and laboratory work. This would
include the characteristics common in maintaining anatomical tooth form which
promotes health of the dental structures. Lab will involve imparting technical skills
utilizing dental wax to recreate anatomical crown morphology and function. Upon
completion of lectures and the labs, students should be able to able to carve anterior
teeth with proper anatomy and contour. They also will be able to understand the
anatomy of the head and oral cavity. Dental Anatomy and Occlusion provides the
student with the basic didactic information and technical skills prerequisite for those
advanced preclinical courses which follow in Restorative Dentistry. This course will be
taught during the third semester second year.
I.
Topics to be covered
Topics
Introduction
Morphology of permanent maxillary and mandibular anterior teeth
Geometric outlines of teeth
Morphology of maxillary premolars
Physiologic tooth form
II.
Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Topics
Introduction to dental anatomy and terminology:
 Anatomy of orofacial complex: form and
function
 Dento-osseous structures
 Types of human dentitions.
 Tooth surfaces, line and point angles.
 Dental formula and notation systems.
 Anatomical landmarks of teeth.
Morphology of permanent teeth (crown and root) &
pulp chambers and canals (endodontic space):






Maxillary central incisor.
Maxillary lateral incisor.
Mandibular central incisor.
Mandibular lateral incisor.
Maxillary canine.
Mandibular canine.
No. of Weeks
Date
No. of Weeks
3
6
2
1
1
Contact
hours
3
25-9-2010
2-10-2010
9-10-2010
1
16-10-2010
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
23-10-2010
30-10-2010
6-11-2010
27-11-2010
4-12-2010
11-12-2010
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
 Geometric forms and functions of teeth
 Maxillary 1st premolar
 Maxillary 2nd premolar
 Physiologic tooth form
 Revision
Lab Practical
1) Introduction
2) Carving of maxillary central incisor
3) Carving of maxillary lateral incisor
4) Revision
5) Carving of mandibular central incisor
6) Carving of mandibular lateral incisor
7) Revision
8) Carving of maxillary canine
9) Carving of mandibular canine
10) Revision
11) Carving of maxillary premolars
12) Revision
13) Revision
Lecture: 14
III.
1
1
1
1
18-12-2010
25-12-2010
1-1-2011
8-1-2011
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
25-9-2010
2-10-2010
9-10-2010
16-10-2010
23-10-2010
30-10-2010
6-11-2010
27-11-2010
4-12-2010
11-12-2010
18-12-2010
25-12-2010
1-1 2011
8-1-2011
Lab: 14
6
No. of Weeks
2
Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
a. Knowledge
(i)
Description of the knowledge to be acquired
a- Knowledge:
By the end of the course, the students will be able to:
a.1. Define dental formulae and depict human dental formula for permanent and
deciduous teeth.
a.2. Comprehend the advantage and disadvantage of different notation systems.
a.3. Describe different stages of tooth development and calcification (chronology).
a.4. Name the landmarks of each tooth.
a.5. Acknowledge the minutiae morphology of human permanent anterior and
upper premolars teeth which are relevant to dental practice.
a.6. Describe the specific anatomical features of each tooth which helps in diagnosis
and treatment of oral diseases.
a.7. Identify the relationship between tooth contours and periodontal health which
helps in aesthetic and clinical treatment.
a.8. Detect any deviation in anatomy of permanent teeth.
(ii)
Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.
2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts
(iii)
Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:
1. Multiple choice question (MCQ).
2. Matching.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) By the end of the course, the students will be able to:
b.1 Demonstrate the ability to recognize patient’s age from the chronology of his/her
teeth.
b.2Develop recognition of tooth abnormalities
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
1. Group Discussion
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
MCQ
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) By the end of the course, students will be able to
a.1. Differentiate between the morphological characteristics of permanent teeth.
a.2. Summarize the relation between the dental and para-dental tissues.
a.3. Depict the common and the uncommon morphology of different root canals and
detect any deviation from usual.
a.4. Illustrate the physiological tooth form that affects the supporting dental and
para-dental tissues.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
1. Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) By the end of the course students will be able to
a.1. Be familiar with different tooth numbering systems.
a.2. Recognize the morphology of permanent teeth.
a.3. Demonstrate the difference between the morphology of anterior permanent teeth.
a.4. Recognize the anatomical land marks of all teeth.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
1.Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
1.Assignments
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
Assessment
Assessment task
(eg. essay, test, examination etc.)
1
Quiz 1
3
Activities (Seminars, assignment …. etc)
2
4
Midterm exam
Written exam-Practical exam
D. Student Support
Week
due
Proportion of Final
Assessment
10th
20%
5th
-----14th
10%
10%
60%
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academic
advice.
Consultations: 2hrs/ week
academic advice: 2hrs/ week
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text:
1. Wheeler's Dental Anatomy, Physiology and Occlusion by Major M. Ash. 2009.
2.Essential References:
1) Dental Anatomy Coloring Book by Margaret J. Fehrenbach. 2007.
2) Woelfel's Dental Anatomy: Its Relevance to Dentistry (Point (Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins) by Rickne C. Scheid. 2007.
3) Kraus Dental Anat & Occlusions by Ronald E. Jordan, Leonard Abrams, and Bertram
S. Kraus. 1992 ( or last edition).
4) Netter's Head and Neck Anatomy for Dentistry (Netter Basic Science)by Neil Scott
Norton. 2006.
5) Illustrated Anatomy of the Head and Neck (Fehrenbach, Illustrated Anatomy of the
Head and Neck) by Margaret J. Fehrenbach and Susan W. Herring. 2006.
6) Berkovitz, B. K. B. (2002). Oral Anatomy, Embryology and Histology. 3rd ed. Mosby,
Edinburgh.
7) Head, Neck and Dental Anatomy by Marjorie J. Short. 2002.
8) Quick Reference Guide Dental Anatomy (Quick Study Academic) by Rich Marino.,
2004
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
 Medicare web Site.
 Pub med.
 Sciencedirect
F. Facilities Required
1. Computing resources
1. Internet.
3. Other resources
1. PowerPoint
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
1. Students/teacher focus groups.
2. Students' personal written reflections.
3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written periodical
exams.
2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal skills
by the department.
3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.
3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching
1. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.
2. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of a
sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in
another institution.
2. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams
3. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode and
median)
Institution
PHYSIOLOGY I
A. Course Identification and General Information
Jazan University
1. Course title and code:
physiology -253
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered:
Dentistry
2. Credit hours:
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
5. Level/year at which this course is offered:
6. Pre-requisites for this course :
7. Co-requisites for this course:
8. Location if not on main campus
B. Objectives
3 Credit hours (2+1).
Dr. Mohamed Abdel
Mohsen
3rd Level , second Year
Biophysics
Al-Shawajarah
At the end of the course the students should be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
Understand the major theories of physiology.
Understand different branches of physiology each individual.
Describe the various mechanisms of actions in physiology.
Describe the general physiological functions of different systems of the body.
Integrate theoretical knowledge of physiology into clinical problem.
Plans for developing and improving the course:
1. Review and analyse collective students' performance in internship rotation each
semester.
2. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching section of
the course every yearly.
3. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and level of
retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demand this course
as prerequisite.
4. Benchmark student performance with other similar program teaching similar course.
The course is required for all undergraduate 2nd year dentist students. The course introduces
the student to various physiological functions and mechanisms of action of different parts of all
body systems. Students involved in this course are expected to, integrate knowledge base from
the basic sciences theory courses; utilize them in understanding physiology. The focus of the
training is on the practical skills in respiratory and blood systems. Learning of students is
Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Physiology I | Page - 18
enhanced through the direct interaction between them and with the teacher in the form of small
group learning (seminars & tutorials) that will help the students to understand well and taking
self confidence.
I.























Topics to be Covered
Topic
Introduction.
General physiology.
Homeostasis
Introduction to autonomic nervous system.
Sympathetic nervous system & its functions.
Noradrenergic receptors.
Parasympathetic nervous system & its functions.
Cholinergic receptors.
Physiology of nerve.
Neurotrophins & their functions
Physiology of muscles.
Differentiate different types of muscles.
Quiz-1
General respiratory functions.
Mechanisms of respiration.
Steps of respiration.
Transport of gases in blood.
Pulmonary function tests (volumes & capacities).
Disorders of respiration (pathophysiology).
Aviation & space physiology.
Deep sea physiology.
General functions of blood.
Red blood cells physiology (pathophysiology of anaemia).
No of
Weeks
1st Week
2nd Week
3rd Week
4th Week
5th Week
6th Week
7th Week
8th Week
9th Week
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contact
hours










White blood cell physiology.
Immunity.
Platelet physiology (bleeding and hemostasis)
Quiz-2
General functions of Gastrointestinal tract (GIT) & their
regulation.
GIT motility.
GIT secretion.
Liver functions & Jaundice.
GIT absorption.
Specific emphasis on swallowing & salivation.

General Revision

Final Exam.
10th Week
11th Week
12th Week
3
3
3
13th Week
14th Week
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 36
3
Tutorial: ----------
Practical Internship:
Other: ---------
3. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
a. Knowledge
1. Integrate theoretical knowledge related to physiology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
3. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories and
physiological modalities
4. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts related to theories and
5. Reading assignment to integrate concepts of physiological theories with actual practice
in pathophysiology of different diseases..
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:
1. Multiple choice question (MCQ) (to recognize main concept of physiology.
2. Short essay (to provide the meaning of different physiological functions and
mechanisms).
b. Cognitive Skills
(i)Cognitive skills to be developed
1. Demonstrate ability to use self abilities on working with colleagues and teacher.
2. Demonstrate knowledgeable skill performance in carrying out specific physiological lab.
Tests.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Role-plays to simulate different behaviours and interaction.
Seminars to insure the appropriate application of different topics.
Case study to develop rationales for pathophysiology and diagnosis.
Attending skill lab. to acquire multidisciplinary professional approach.
Scenarios to critique and propose physiological case study, as well as means of
evaluation of case.
1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different physiological functions).
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developed
1. Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards different topics of physiology.
2. Value one’s own mental health practices as a professional physiologist.
1. Conviction mirror to reflect behaviour during role plays assisting in self-awareness.
2. Videotaping of actual students interactions in groups or one-to-one student patient
interaction (or role plays) to teach dynamics of interaction.
3. Direct usage of lab. tools (real-life simulation) to apply and critique interpersonal skills.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility
1. Oral semi structure interview (to demonstrate the ability of communications).
2. Seminar (to present project outcome as a demonstration of ability to apply interviewing
and interpersonal therapeutic communication skills between student and teacher).
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Use of web based material related to anatomy and histology to apprise the advanced
understanding of practical physiology.
Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of these materials.
Assignments (to present recent different topic related to physiology).
Assessment Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
Week due
1
Quiz 1
5th
2
Quiz 2
10th
15 %
3
Activities (Seminars, tutorials, survey, presentation,
assignment …. etc) and regular attendance.
------
10 %
14th
60 %
4
Final written exam
Proportion
of Final
Assessment
15 %
D. Student Support
1.Arrangements for visiting different will occupied laboratories
2. Providing good environment for studying e.g. data shows, computers and air
conditioned classes.
2. Required Text(s):
1- Gyuton and hall physiology 2006.
C. 2. Essential References
1- Gannong physiology 2010.
2. Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc






Medicare web Site.
EBSCO web Site.
Pub med.
Medicare.
Apta.org
Wikipedia.
1. Internet.
2. Membership in web based physiological data bases.
3. Membership in evidence-based physiological sites.
4. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirements
or attach list)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Video recording apparatus and facility.
Conviction mirror.
Magmatic teaching board.
PowerPoint/ transparency projector
1.
2.
3.
4.
Students/teacher focus groups.
Students' personal written reflections.
Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.
Students' clinical training appraisal questionnaire
exams.
by the department.
4. Feedback to/from clinical preceptors
1.
2.
3.
4.
Staff development of areas which are not satisfactorily taught.
Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.
Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.
Clinical preceptor training.
1. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams.
median).
another institution).
4. Clinical examination of independent physical therapy faculty member.
5. Co evaluation of students' performance including course teacher and lab. preceptor
BIOCHEMISTRY I
1. Institution:
2. College:
A. Course identification and general
information
b. Credit hours
d. Name of faculty member responsible
for course
e. Year/Semester at which course offered
g. Co-requisites for the course
Dentistry
Biochemistry I, 255 DMS
2
Dentistry
Dr Ayman Darwish
2nd year | 3rdSemester
106 PRE, 109 PRE
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Define the biochemistry, describe the chemical composition of humans.
Describe the carbohydrate, and lipid compounds found in humans.
Describe the general structure of fatty acid
To define and identify high energy bonds
To describe the glycogen metabolism, glycolytic pathway, citric acid cycle, hexose
monophosphate shunt, gluconeogenesis with particular stress on its regulation, and the
role in metabolism
To describe lipid digestion
To depict fatty aid activation and oxidation
To describe fatty aid biosynthesis y fatty acid Synthase multienzyme complex and
triglyceride biosynthesis
To outline ketone body metabolism
To depict the structure and classes of lipoprotein
The course is required for all undergraduate 2 nd year BDS students. This course is
designed to equip the students with necessary knowledge of biochemistry that would
enable them to work with proficiency in a hospital environment.
Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Biochemistry I | Page - 25
I.
Topics
Introduction
Intermediary Metabolism
Integration of Metabolism
Lipid Metabolism
II.
Topics
Introduction
Intermediary Metabolism:
1) Introduction to carbohydrates
2) Digestion and absorption of
carbohydrates
3) Glycogen metabolism
4) Oxidative Phosphorylation
5) Glycolysis
6) Tricarboxylic acid cycle
7) Gluconeogenesis
8) Pentose phosphate pathway and NADPH
Integration of Metabolism
1. Insulin
a. Regulation of insulin secretion
b. Metabolic effects of insulin
2. Hypoglycemia and its types
3. Diabetes Mellitus
4. OBESITY
TUTORIAL
Lipid Metabolism
14) Introduction to Lipids
15) Lipoproteins & lipid profile
16) Cell membranes
17) Digestion and absorption of Lipids
18) Metabolism of dietary lipids
19) Fatty acid and triglyceride metabolism
specially:
a. β-oxidation of fatty acids
b. Ketogenesis & Ketolysis & Ketosis
c. Fatty acid synthesis
d. Triglyceride synthesis and catabolism
and hormonal regulation
20) Cholesterol synthesis
TUTORIAL
No. of Weeks
1
No. of Weeks
1
4½W
1W
5½W
Date
26-9-2010
Contact
hours
2
1
½W
2-10-2010
16-10-2010
1W
6-11-2010
1W
22-11-2010
1W
½W
½W
½W
½W
29-11-2010
06-12-2010
11-12-2010
13-12-2010
18-12-2010
2
1
1
1
1
½W
03-01-2011
1
1W
½W
½W
½W
½W
½W
½W
½W
½W
1W
19-10-2010
26-10-2010
30-10-2010
1-11-2010
6-11-2010
20-12-2010
25-12-2010
27-12-2010
01-01-2011
08-01-2011
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
Lecture: 26
I.
Tutorial: 4
Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester
a. Knowledge
(iv)
a. At the end of the course the students should be able to understand, recall,
describe(read):
a) The basic processes of life in molecular terms using the cell as a unit of study.
b) The normal and abnormal biochemical processes in man.
c) The impact of the inherited metabolic disorders in medicine.
b. At the end of the course the students should be able to integrate theoretical
knowledge related to biochemistry into clinical practice
(v)
(vi)
2. Matching.
b. Cognitive Skills
1. Demonstrate ability to use biochemical markers of diabetes and lipid profiles on
working with colleagues, family members, and teacher.
1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of metabolic problems.
1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different metabolic abnormalities).
2. Scenarios or real-life simulation (to interpret/ apply psychodynamic of dentist in clinic
in presence of diabetic patient).
1. Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards medical disorders of the dental
patients.
1. Use of web based material related to medical biochemistry of metabolism.
1. Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material
1. Assignments (to present recent different topic related to metabolic diseases)
Assessment
1
2
3
4
Quiz 1
Quiz 2
Assessment task
Written exam
D. Student Support
Week
due
5th
10th
-----14th
Proportion of Final
Assessment
15%
15%
10%
60%
advice.
3. Required Text:
1. A Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. T. M. Devlin, 6th Edition,
2006, Wiley- Liss publisher. ISBN 978-0-470-28173-4
1. Essential References:
1. Biochemistry: A Short Course [Deckle Edge]. John L. Tymoczko, Jeremy M. Berg, Lubert
Stryer. 2010, W. H. Freeman and Company publisher. ISBN: 0-7167-5840-7.
2. Biochemistry, Lippincott’s Illustrated Reviews. Richard Harvey & Denise Ferrier, 5th
Edition, 2010, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Publisher. ISBN: 9781609139988.
 Pub med.
 Sciencedirect
1. Internet.
2. Other resources
5. PowerPoint
1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written
periodical exams.
2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal
skills by the department.
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty
member in another institution.
median)
INTRODUCTION TO DENTAL PROFESSION, BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES & ETHICS
1. Institution:
2. College:
A. Course identification and general
information
b. Credit hours
d. Name of faculty member responsible
for course
Dentistry
Introduction to Dental Profession,
Behavioural Sciences & Ethics, 261
DEN
1
Dentistry
Dr.Ashwin.J.
Dr.Aadil Inamdar
2nd year | 3rdSemester
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives
Upon completion of the course the students should be able to:











Provide an over view of the concepts, principles and procedures of various specialties in
dentistry.
Address the behavioural aspects in Dentistry with particular emphasis placed on
understanding human behaviour, patient management and the ethical responsibility
inherent within the scope of the dental profession.
Development of health culture, tasks, classification, uniqueness of medicine
Principles of dental education and foundation of schools of dental studies.
Dental information and documentation (educational, clinical, scientific, practical
application), visual media and dental medicine.
Understand different modes of ethical reasoning.
Describe legal and ethical codes and the relationship to malpractice lawsuits.
Know about informed consent and peer review.
Understand importance of confidentiality in different patient conditions.
Recognize the importance of professionalism.
Be aware of professional and ethical decision making.
This course is provided as a one of the first courses to the 1 st year Dental students
enrolled in college of Dental Sciences. This course gives the students, an overview of
dentistry. The course will provide the dental students with an introduction to concepts,
Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Introduction to Dental Profession, Behavioural Sciences &
Ethics | Page - 30
principles and procedures of various disciplines in dentistry with emphasis on
prevention, comprehensive treatment and patient management. Dental curriculum
orientation and regulations in pre-clinic and clinic area will be provided. The second
part of the course will deal with Behavioural dentistry. It will deal with the
interdisciplinary field concerned with development and integration of behavioural and
bio-dental science knowledge and techniques relevant to oral health and disease, and
the application of this knowledge and these techniques in prevention, diagnosis,
treatment and rehabilitation. The third part of the course in ethics aims to develop
dental practitioners to think and act in ethical manner. The course will help students
understand the ethical and legal principles common in dentistry. The course will
provide information on the legal requirements of informed consent, and the
maintenance of confidentiality in the dental environment.
I.
Topics
Introduction to Dentistry
Operative Dentistry
Dental Radiology
Pedodontics
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Prosthodontic Dental Sciences
Community Dentistry
Orthodontics
Periodontics
Oral Pathology
Oral Medicine & Diagnosis
Endodontics
Behavioral Science & communication skills & Ethics in
Dentistry
Behavioral Dentistry
Total
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14
14
III.
No. of Weeks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
Practical/Fieldwork/Internship
-
Contact hours
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
Others
-
Addition learning hours expected for students per week -20/Semester
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Should know the
Lectures.
different
Method of
Assessment
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
Ethics | Page - 31
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
e. Psychomotor skills
specialities in
dentistry.
Should know the
different
procedures carried
out in different
specialities in
dentistry
Demonstrate
ethical relationship
with staff.
Should develop
good working
relations with his
professional
colleagues.
Should follow
proper protocol for
regular clinical
attendance
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
knowledge related
to various fields in
dentistry by
increased use of
internet/web based
information
-
Lectures.
Interactive sessions
with students
exam
Final theory exam
Orals/viva-voce
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous
monitoring of
students by
concerned staff.
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
different dental
specialities.
Registration of
online journals
-
Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Continuous Assessment
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Summative Assessment
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
-
V.
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
Faculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice
Consultations: 2hrs|week
Academic advice: 2hrs|week
Ethics | Page - 32
1. An Introduction to the History of Dentistry: With Medical & Dental Chronology &
Bibliographic Data by Bernhard Wolf Weinberger. 2005.
2. A New Introduction to Social and Behavioural Sciences in Dentistry by Gibson
Newton. 2007.
3. Essential Skills for Dentists by Peter Mossey, Gareth Holsgrove, Elizabeth Davenport,
and David Stirrups. 2006.
4. Understanding Dental Health (Understanding Health and Sickness Series) by Francis
G. Serio. 1998.
5. Professionalism and Ethics for Dental Care Professionals by Fiona Stuart-Wilson.
2009.
6. Good Medical Practice: Professionalism, Ethics and Law by Kerry J. Breen, Stephen
M. Cordner, Colin J. H. Thomson, and Vernon D. Plueckhahn. 2010.
a. Accommodation
 Lecture rooms for 40-60 students
 Labs for 40-60 students
 Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility
 Computers with access to internet
 Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals
c. Other resources
 Overhead projectors
 Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups
 Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching
 Student’s personal written feedbacks
 Teaching appraisal questionnaire
b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the
department:
 Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodic
examinations and assessments exercises.
 Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating the
effectiveness of teaching.
 Peer evaluations.
 Students and departmental feedbacks.

By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on its
improvement.
 Continuing dental education programs.
 Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.
Ethics | Page - 33

Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examination
committee
 Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports
 Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and faculty
from outside the college
 Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as a
whole
e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:
Review:
 Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching
fields.
 Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferable
skills.
 Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge
from faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.
 Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similar
institutes and working on its improvement.
Planning
 Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and
requirements.
 Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvement
strategies.
 Provide additional training for staff as and when required.
 Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement
strategies.
 Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line with
Ethics | Page - 34
4 T H SEMESTER
SECOND YEAR
FOURTH SEMESTER
TH
PR
CODE
COURSE TITLE
211 MDS
Oral Biology & Histology I
222 RDS
224 RDS
252 DMS
254 DMS
256 DMS
103 ISLM
TOTAL
Advanced Dental
Biomaterials
Dental Anatomy &
Occlusion II
Gross Anatomy &
Histology II
Physiology II
Biochemistry II
Islamic Culture III
7
CRH
COH
4
1
3
2
1
3
2
3
3
0
3
3
2
1
3
2
2
2
12
Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Page - 35
3
2
6
5
21
19
4
4
9
5
5
2
33
P-REQ
106 PRE,
109 PRE
221 RDS
223 RDS
251 DMS
253 DMS
255 DMS
Institution
ORAL BIOLOGY & HISTOLOGY I
1
3
Contact hours
2
Credit hours
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jazan University
Oral Biology & Histology I
211 MDS
2 Credit hours (1+3)
4 contact hours
Dentistry
Prof. Naglaa Nagy
Prof. Amel Radwan El Hak
4th Level
Second Year
106 PRE, 109 PRE; 211 MDS
------
Al-Shawgra
B Objectives






Understand the Emberiology of the facial and oral structure.
Identify the biological principles and details of the development, structure, and function
of the hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity.
Understand the normal structures of the oral tissues which helps in diagnosis regarding
oral pathology and oral medicine courses.
Realize the macroscopic and microscopic anatomy of the dental structure.
Identify the histological structures of enamel, dentine, pulp, cementum and periodontal
ligament.
Recognize the function of the dental structure
2. Plans for developing and improving the course:
Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Oral Biology & Histology I | Page - 36
The Oral Biology & Histology I course in dentistry covers the development, microscopic
and sub-microscopic structure and functional aspects of hard dental of the oral cavity. It
also covers the Embryonic development of head and neck; morpho-differentiation of
face and oral structures; and relationships between development and structure, and
function in the histology and ultrastructure of oral tissues. The course thus serves as a
preparatory course for Oral pathology, Oral medicine, Orthodontics and Periodontics in
the following years. The Oral Biology course will consolidate and augment information
for the following year of study. The basic-bridging knowledge in this course will assist
students in building up learning strategies, approaching and understanding clinical
courses, and add to the student’s ability to clinically evaluate a patient, thus preparing
the student for the courses in clinical sciences.
I.
Topics
Emberiology
Teeth Development&Formation
Hard dental structure
Pulp & Periodontal ligament
II.
Topics






Emberiology

No. of Weeks
3
Teeth development and formation
3
Enamel,
development,composition,properties, and
structure
Dentine and Pulp ,development, properties
structure and function
Cementum and root formation , histological
Periodontal ligament ,histological structure
and function
Lab.Practical

No. of Weeks
3
3
6
3
Emberiology
Teeth development and formation
3
3
2
1
Date
12,19,26
2-2011
5,12,19
3-2011
26,2,16
4-2011
23,30,7
4,5-2011
14,21
5-2011
28-5-2011
15
NO. of. weeks
3
3
Date
12,19,26
2-2011
5,12,19
Contact
hours
3
3
3
3
2
1
15
Contact
hours
9
9





Enamel, development, composition,
properties, and structure
Dentine and Pulp ,development, properties
Cementum and root formation , histological
Periodontal ligament ,histological structure
and function
Revision
3
3-2011
9
1
26,2,16
4-2011
23,30,7
4,5-2011
14-5-2011
1
28-5-2011
3
3
1
21-5-2011
a. Knowledge
(i)
a.1. Describe different stages of tooth development and calcification.
a.2. Depict development, structure and function of different mineralized oral tissues
(dentin, enamel, cementum ).
a.3. Name the factors which influence the organizational development of dental and
a.4.
para-dental tissue.
a.5. Describe biological features of oral and dental tissue formation which helps in
diagnosis and treatment of oral diseases.
a.6. Identify the intimate relationship between the tooth and its surrounding tissue
which helps in clinical treatment of diseases.
a.7. List structural changes and mechanisms involved in craniofacial development
and growth.
a.8. Describe different phases of prenatal development.
(ii)
(iii)
4. Matching.
b. Cognitive Skills
9
3
3
(i)
Cognitive skills to be developed
a.1. Develop recognition of physiological process of deciduous tooth exfoliation.
a.2. Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts of tooth eruption.
a.3. Develop recognition of abnormalities of teeth behavior.
a.4. Demonstrate the importance of the periodontium.
a.5. Depict the affiliation of different parts of the masticatory system (TMJ, teeth and
muscles).
a.6. Illustrate the structural functional relationship of different parts of oral mucosa.
a.7. Realize the significant difference in structure and function of major and minor
salivary glands.
a.8. Recognition of relationship between maxillary sinus and maxillary teeth.
2. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of abnormal developmental
problems.
3. MCQ
4.
c.1. Summarize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to
Oral Biology.
c.2. Distinguish and evaluate normal dental and para-dental structure which helps
in diagnosis of diseases
c.3. Asses and interpret information from various Oral Biology sources.
c.4. Specify appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using
normal oral structure and function.
c.5. Develop a reasoned argument to common and uncommon problems relevant
to Oral Biology.
d.1. Recognize function related to structure of oral tissues.
d.2. Demonstrate deviation in ordinary appearance of soft and hard oral tissues.
d.3. Respond to environmental changes in dental and paradental tissue.
d.4. Plan, design, record, execute and communicate an independent research using
Oral Biology media and techniques.
Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material
Assignments
Assessment
Assessment task
1
Quiz 1
3
2
4
Quiz 2
Written exam
Week
due
Proportion of Final
Assessment
10th
20%
5th
-----14th
10%
10%
60%
D. Student Support
advice.
1. Required Text:
a. Oral Histology: Development, Structure, and Function by A. R. Ten Cate. 2008
Essential References:
1. Orban's Oral Histology & Embryology by Bhaskar. 2006.
2. Essentials of Oral Histology and Embryology: A Clinical Approach (Avery, Essentials
of Oral Histology and Embryology) by James K. Avery and Daniel J. Chiego. 2005.
3. Essentials of Oral Biology: Oral Anatomy, Histology, Physiology and Embryology by
M. Jose. 2008.
4. Craniofacial Sutures: Development, Disease and Treatment (Frontiers of Oral
Biology) by David P. Rice. 2008.
5. Comparative Dental Morphology: Selected Papers of the 14th International
Symposium on Dental Morphology. 2008.
6. Greifswald, Germany (Frontiers of Oral Biology) by T. Koppe, G. Meyer, K. W. Alt, and
A. Brook. 2009.
7. Oral Anatomy, Histology and Embryology by Barry K B Berkovitz BDS MSc PhD FDS
(ENG), G. R. Holland BSc BDS PhD CERT ENDO, and Bernard J Moxham. 2009.
 Pub med.
 Sciencedirect
1. Internet.
3. Other resources
1. PowerPoint
exams.
by the department.
median)
ADVANCED DENTAL BIOMATERIALS
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
d. Name of faculty member responsible for
course
Jazan University
Advanced Dental
Biomaterials, 222 RDS.
1
Dentistry
2nd Year | 4thSemester
221 RDS.
--
B. Objectives
By the end of the course the students should:




Have a thorough knowledge of dental materials and the skill to manipulate these
materials.
Learn how to attain the best physical and mechanical properties of the materials.
Be able to modify procedures and be able to diagnose and correct errors in material
handling and manipulation.
Be able to evaluate, be able to compare and select restorative dental materials for
laboratory and clinical use.
This will be the second of the two courses taken after the introductory course in Dental
materials. A thorough knowledge of dental materials and the skill to manipulate these
materials will be taught through series of lectures and in lecture demonstrations.
Restorative materials, miscellaneous dental materials, dental waxes, gypsum products,
and impression materials are covered in this sub course. The course prepares the
student to identify terms related to dental restorative materials, identify the
composition and properties of dental amalgam, identify the preparation procedures for
dental amalgam, identify mercury hygiene practices, identify the composition and
properties of zinc phosphate cement, identify the preparation procedures for zinc
phosphate cement, identify the characteristics and preparation procedures for
polycarboxylate cement, glass ionomer cement and identify the characteristics and
clinical uses of zinc oxide and eugenol. The course thus deals with the basic preparation
of the student in Dental biomaterials. The course will have one credit hour.
Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Advanced Dental Biomaterials | Page - 43
I.
Topics
Denture base materials
Dental waxes
Dental cements
Composite resin
Bonding agents
Dental Amalgam
Investment materials
Casting of metals
Dental casting alloys
wrought alloys
Finishing and polishing materials
Tarnish and corrosion
Revision
II.
Course Component
Lectures
1. Denture base materials (ideal
requirements , classification, heat
and cold-curing acrylic denture
base and modified acrylic resins)
2. Denture base materials
(manipulation of heat cured
acrylic denture base, defects that
may occurs during processing ,
properties and artificial teeth)
3. Dental waxes (general
composition, characteristic
properties, classification)
4. Dental cements (applications,
requirements, classifications, zinc
oxide eugenol and zinc phosphate
cements).
5. Dental cements (zinc
polycarboxylate, glass ionomer
cements, resin cements and
calcium hydroxide)
6. Composite resin (requirements
of filling materials, applications,
composition and classification)
1. Composite resin manipulation,
properties and new trends of
dental composite)
2. Bonding agents Introduction,
components, generations and
No. of Weeks
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
Tutorials
Contact hours
8
4
8
8
4
8
8
4
8
4
4
4
Practical/Fieldwork/
Internship
Material identification and
laboratory steps
demonstration.
Material identification and
laboratory steps
demonstration.
Material identification.
Material identification with
manual and video
demonstration of their
application. For each type
manual and video
demonstration of their
application. For each type
manual on extracted tooth
and video demonstration
Others
applications)
3. Dental Amalgam (introduction,
indications, contraindication,
amalgam terminology,
classifications, low copper
amalgam, high copper amalgam,
4. Dental Amalgam (manipulation
and proportion )
5. Investment materials (ideal
requirements, general
composition, low temperature
investment (GBI))
6. Investment materials (high
temperature investments
composition and properties)
7. Casting of metals: lost wax
technique, steps and casting
defects)
8. Dental casting alloys (general
requirements, different
classifications, gold casting alloys)
9. Dental casting alloys (base
metal alloys composition and
types)
10.
Wrought alloys: types, uses
and properties.
11.
Dental porcelain and all
ceramic restorations. (ceramic
structure, properties, applications ,
classifications, composition and
manipulation).
12.
Finishing and polishing
materials
13.
I.
Revision
video demonstration.
Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semester
a- knowledge and understanding
a.1. Understand deeply the chemical and physical basics essential for handling of the dental
biomaterials.
a.2. Situate the limitations and the durability of every material in an objective dental and social
perspective
a.3. Select the proper material for a specific dental treatment judiciously and in a wellCourse Specifications | 4th Semester | Advanced Dental Biomaterials | Page - 45
considered manner
a.4. Select material from the commercial market independently and critically
b- Intellectual skills
b1 Analyze the problems systematically and solve them.
b2 Distinguish the best innovative dental techniques, materials and tools.
b3 Criticize the scientific studies.
c- Professional and practical skills
c1 Solve the problems that will aid in making appropriate selections of materials for each
patient's unique needs.
c2 Inform the patient correctly, objectively and sufficiently about possible side-effects of the
materials.
d- General and transferable skills
Through group working in research, the dental student will:
d1 Gain the skill of discussing and accepting different opinion.
d2 Use and access a rang of learning resources.
d3 Evaluate his own strength and weakness.
e- Attitude
Through the communication with the staff members, the student will:
e1 Develop ethical characters for good communication generally with people and specifically
with patients.
e2 Have self-confidence.
e3 Have emotional maturity.
e4 Demonstrate ethical relationship with staff.
IV.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
Proportion
15%
60%
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Practical Exams
Written Exams
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
Academic advice: 2hrs/week
1. Phillips' Science of Dental Materials (Anusavice Phillip's Science of Dental Materials) by
Kenneth J. Anusavice. 2003.
2. Delmar's Dental Materials Guide by Donna J. Phinney and Judy H. Halstead. 2008.
3. Dental Materials: Properties and Manipulation (Dental Materials: Properties &
Manipulation (Craig)) by John M. Powers PhD and John C. Wataha. 2007.
4. Dental Materials and Their Selection by William J. O'Brien. 2009.
5. Clinical Aspects of Dental Materials: Theory, Practice, and Cases by Marcia A. Gladwin
and Michael Bagby. 2008.
6. Craig's Restorative Dental Materials by John M. Powers PhD and Ronald L. Sakaguchi.
2006.
7. Applied Dental Materials by John F. McCabe and Angus Walls. 2008.
8. Dental Materials: Clinical Applications for Dental Assistants and Dental Hygienists by
Carol Dixon Hatrick, W. Stephen Eakle, and William F. Bird. 2010.
9. Materials in Dentistry: Principles and Applications by Jack L. Ferracane. 2001.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:




Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodic
Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating the
Peer evaluations.



improvement.
 Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examination
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
DENTAL ANATOMY & OCCLUSION II
Institution
Jazan University
College
1
Dental Anatomy & Occlusion
II, 224 RDS
3
Contact hours
5 contact hours
2
Credit hours
4
5
7
6
8
9
B Objectives
Dentistry
Prof.Amel Radwan el Hak
Prof.Naglaa Nagy
4th Level
Second Year
106 PRE, 162 PRE; 223 RDS
Al-Shawgra
10
------
After the completion of the course, the student should have knowledge of the following:






Descriptive terms in human masticatory system and dental anatomy.
Macroscopic structure of the characteristics of the endodontic space of posterior
permanent and deciduous teeth (pulp chamber and canal).
Sequence of eruption of both permanent and deciduous teeth.
Differentiate between permanent and deciduous teeth.
Development of tooth occlusion and articulation
Macroscopic structure of the features of the crown and the root of both permanent and
deciduous teeth
a. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching
b. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and
Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Dental Anatomy & Occlusion II | Page - 49
Dental Anatomy & Occlusion II is a 2 credit hour course. It deals with the basics of dental
and orofacial structures (mainly, the anatomy, morphology and occlusion of human dentition;
permanent and deciduous). It includes the dental arches relationship; teeth alignment and
occlusion. The characteristics that maintain anatomical form which promotes health of the
dental supporting structures. Laboratory involves imparting technical skills utilizing dental wax
to carve human teeth.
Upon completion of lectures, tutorials and laboratory, students will be able to carve
posterior teeth with proper anatomy, occlusion and contour. Dental anatomy and occlusion
provides the student with the basic didactic information and technical skills prerequisite for
advanced preclinical courses in restorative dentistry.
I.
Topics
Morphology of mandibular premolars
Morphology of permanent maxillary and mandibular molars
Deciduous teeth characteristics and outlines
Forensics and comparative anatomy
Temporomandibular joint
Relation and occlusion of teeth
II.
Topics
Morphology of permanent teeth (crown and
root) & pulp chambers and canals (endodontic


space):
Mandibular first premolar.
Mandibular second premolar
No. of Weeks
1
1

Maxillary molars.

Mandibular molars.
3
Forensics and comparative anatomy
1



Deciduous teeth
3
2
1
Date
No. of Weeks
2
4
2
1
1
2
12-2-2011
19-2-2011
26-2-2011
5-3-2011
12-3-2011
19-3-2011
26-3-2011
2-4-2011
16-4-2011
23-4-2011
30-4-2011
Contact
hours
1
1
3
3
2
1
1



Occlusion
2
Revision
1
1
Revision
Lab Practical
1. Revision on upper premolars
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Carving of mandibular first premolar
Carving of mandibular second premolar
Revision
Carving of maxillary first molar
Carving of maxillary second molar
Revision
Carving mandibular first molar
Carving of mandibular second molar
Revision
No. of Weeks
2
Lectures:14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
7-5-2011
2
21-5-2011
1
14-5-2011
28-5-2011
12-2-2011
19-2-2011
26-2-2011
5-3-2011
12-3-2011
19-3-2011
26-3-2011
2-4-2011
16-4-2011
23-4-2011
30-4-2011
7-5-2011
14-5-2011
21-5-2011
28-5-2011
Lab: 14
a. Knowledge
(i)
b- Knowledge:
By the end of the course, the students will be able to:
b.1. Differentiate between permanent and deciduous teeth.
b.2. Comprehend the characteristics of deciduous teeth.
b.3. Describe anatomical land marks of temporomandibular joint.
b.4. Acknowledge the minutiae morphology of human permanent posterior teeth
which are relevant to dental practice.
b.5. Describe the specific anatomical features of each tooth which helps in diagnosis
and treatment of oral diseases.
b.6. Identify an extracted tooth.
b.7. Detect any deviation in anatomy of permanent teeth.
b.8. Describe the anatomy of temporomandibular join.
1
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
b.9. Describe the relation of teeth in occlusion
(ii)
2. Matching.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) By the end of the course, the students will be able to:
b.1 Demonstrate the ability to recognize patient’s age from the chronology of his/her
teeth.
b.2 Develop recognition of tooth abnormalities
b.3 Develop recognition of teeth relation in occlusion.
1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of metabolic problems.
1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different metabolic abnormalities).
2. Scenarios or real-life simulation (to interpret/ apply psychodynamic of dentist in
clinic in presence of diabetic patient).
(i) By the end of the course, students will be able to
a.1. Differentiate between the morphological characteristics of permanent teeth.
a.2. Summarize the relation between the dental and para-dental tissues.
a.3. Depict the common and the uncommon morphology of different root canals and
detect any deviation from usual.
a.4. Illustrate tooth contour that affects the supporting dental and para-dental
tissues.
Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.
1.
(i) By the end of the course students will be able to
a.1. Be familiar with occlusion of permanent and deciduouse teeth .
a.2. Recognize the morphology of permanent teeth.
a.3. Demonstrate the difference between the morphology of posterior permanent
teeth.
a.4. Recognize anatomy of temporomandibular joint.
1.Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material
1.Assignments
Assessment
Assessment task
1
Quiz 1
3
2
4
Midterm exam
Written exam-Practical exam
Week
due
Proportion of Final
Assessment
10th
20%
5th
-----14th
10%
10%
60%
D. Student Support
advice.
1. Required Text:
2. Wheeler's Dental Anatomy, Physiology and Occlusion by Major M. Ash. 2009.
2.Essential References:
1. Dental Anatomy Coloring Book by Margaret J. Fehrenbach. 2007.
2. Woelfel's Dental Anatomy: Its Relevance to Dentistry (Point (Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins) by Rickne C. Scheid. 2007.
3. Kraus Dental Anat & Occlusions by Ronald E. Jordan, Leonard Abrams, and
Bertram S. Kraus. 1992 ( or last edition).
4. Netter's Head and Neck Anatomy for Dentistry (Netter Basic Science)by Neil
Scott Norton. 2006.
5. Illustrated Anatomy of the Head and Neck (Fehrenbach, Illustrated Anatomy of
the Head and Neck) by Margaret J. Fehrenbach and Susan W. Herring. 2006.
6. Berkovitz, B. K. B. (2002). Oral Anatomy, Embryology and Histology. 3rd ed.
Mosby, Edinburgh.
7. Head, Neck and Dental Anatomy by Marjorie J. Short. 2002.
8. Quick Reference Guide Dental Anatomy (Quick Study Academic) by Rich Marino.,
2004
 Pub med.
 Sciencedirect
1. Internet.
2. Other resources
1. PowerPoint
1- Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
i.
Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the
Department
1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written
periodical exams.
2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal
1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member
in another institution.
median)
Institution
PHYSIOLOGY II
College
Jazan University
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code:
physiology -253
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered:
Dentistry
2. Credit hours:
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the
course
5. Level/year at which this course is offered:
6. Pre-requisites for this course :
7. Co-requisites for this course: ----8. Location if not on main campus
3 Credit hours (2+1).
Dr. Mohamed Abdel Mohsen
4th Level , second Year
Biophysics and other physiologic branches.
Al Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
Understand the major theories of physiology.
Understand different branches of physiology each individual.
Describe the various mechanisms of actions in physiology.
Describe the general physiological functions of different systems of the body.
Integrate theoretical knowledge of physiology into clinical problem.
1. Review and analyse collective students' performance in internship rotation each
semester.
section of the course every yearly.
level of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that
demand this course as prerequisite.
4. Benchmark student performance with other similar program teaching similar
course.
Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Physiology II | Page - 55
The course is required for all undergraduate 2nd year dentist students. The course introduces
the student to various physiological functions and mechanisms of action of different parts of all
body systems. Students involved in this course are expected to, integrate knowledge base from
the basic sciences theory courses; utilize them in understanding physiology. The focus of the
training is on the practical skills in cardiovascular, nervous and blood systems. Learning of
students is enhanced through the direct interaction between them and with the teacher in the
form of small group learning (seminars & tutorials) that will help the students to understand
well and taking self confidence.
1 Topics to be Covered































Topic
Cardiac muscles & their properties.
ECG.
Cardiac cycle & heart sounds.
Cardiac output & its regulation.
Blood flow & its regulation.
Blood pressure & its regulation.
Arterial pulse & capillary circulation.
Blood brain barier & shock.
Cardiovascular reserve
Exercise physiology.
Food intake & temperature regulation.
Sensations & sensory receptors.
Dorsal & anterolateral lemniscal system.
Quiz-1
Sensations from the head.
Somatic sensory cortex.
Motor functions of spinal cord.
Motor functions of the brain stem.
Motor functions of basal ganglia.
Cerebellum, thalamus & limbic system.
Sleep & memory
Vision & hearing.
Smell & taste.
Male genital system.
Female genital system.
Pituitary & thyroid glands.
Adrenal & pancreas.
Calcium homeostasis.
Quiz-2
Glomerular filteration.
Tubular functions.
No of
Weeks
1st Week
2nd
Week
3rd
Week
4th Week
5th Week
Contact
hours
3
3
3
3
3
6th Week
3
7th Week
3
8th Week
3
10th
Week
3
9th Week
11th
3
3





Control of ECF & osmolarity.
Week
General Revision
13th
12th
Week
Acid base balance.
Practical exam.
Week
14th
Final Exam.
Week
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 36
3
Tutorial: ----------
Practical Internship:
Other: ---------
a. Knowledge
1. Integrate theoretical knowledge related to physiology.
1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories and
2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts related to theories and
3. Reading assignment to integrate concepts of physiological theories with actual practice
in pathophysiology of different diseases..
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:
1. Multiple choice question (MCQ) (to recognize main concept of physiology.
2. Short essay (to provide the meaning of different physiological functions and
mechanisms).
b. Cognitive Skills
1. Demonstrate ability to use self abilities on working with colleagues and teacher.
2. Demonstrate knowledgeable skill performance in carrying out specific physiological lab.
Tests.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Role-plays to simulate different behaviours and interaction.
Seminars to insure the appropriate application of different topics.
Case study to develop rationales for pathophysiology and diagnosis.
Attending skill lab. to acquire multidisciplinary professional approach.
Scenarios to critique and propose physiological case study, as well as means of
evaluation of case.
1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different physiological functions).
1. Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards different topics of physiology.
2. Value one’s own mental health practices as a professional physiologist.
1. Conviction mirror to reflect behaviour during role plays assisting in self-awareness.
2. Video taping of actual students interactions in groups or one-to-one student patient
interaction (or role plays) to teach dynamics of interaction.
3. Direct usage of lab. tools (real-life simulation) to apply and critique interpersonal skills.
1. Oral semi structure interview (to demonstrate the ability of communications).
2. Seminar (to present project outcome as a demonstration of ability to apply interviewing
and interpersonal therapeutic communication skills between student and teacher).
Use of web based material related to anatomy and histology to apprise the advanced
understanding of practical physiology.
Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of these materials.
Assignments (to present recent different topic related to physiology).
Assessment Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
Week due
1
Quiz 1
5th
2
Quiz 2
10th
10 %
3
Activities (Seminars, tutorials, survey, presentation,
assignment …. etc) and regular attendance.
------
10 %
Final written exam
12th
14th
10 %
4
Practical exam
5
Proportion
of Final
Assessment
10 %
60 %
D. Student Support
1.Arrangements for visiting different will occupied laboratories
2. Providing good environment for studying e.g. data shows, computers and air
conditioned classes.
1. Required Text(s):
2- Gyuton and hall physiology 2006.
D. 2. Essential References
1- Gannong physiology 2010.






Medicare web Site.
EBSCO web Site.
Pub med.
Medicare.
Apta.org
Wikipedia.
1. Internet.
2. Membership in web based physiological data bases.
3. Membership in evidence-based physiological sites.
2. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Video recording apparatus and facility.
Conviction mirror.
Magmatic teaching board.
PowerPoint/ transparency projector
1.
2.
3.
4.
Students/teacher focus groups.
Students' personal written reflections.
Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.
Students' clinical training appraisal questionnaire
exams.
by the department.
4. Feedback to/from clinical preceptors
1.
2.
3.
4.
Staff development of areas which are not satisfactorily taught.
Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.
Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.
Clinical preceptor training.
1. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams.
median).
another institution).
4. Clinical examination of independent physical therapy faculty member.
5. Co evaluation of students' performance including course teacher and lab. preceptor
BIOCHEMISTRY II
Institution
1 Course title and code
2 Credit hours
3 Contact hours
4 Program(s) in which the course is offered
5 Name of faculty member responsible for the course
6 Level at which this course is offered
7 Year at which this course is offered
8 Pre-requisites for this course
9 Co-requisites for this course
10 Location if not on main campus
B Objectives
Jazan University
Biochemistry II (256 DMS)
5 contact hours
Dentistry
Dr. Ayman Darwish
4th Level
Second Year
255 DMS
-----Al-shawgra
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Describe the protein compounds found in humans.
Describe the general structure of amino acid
To define and identify protein structure, and types.
To describe conversion of amino acids to specialized products.
To describe nucleotide metabolism.
To show DNA structure, replication, and repair
To depict RNA structure, synthesis and processing
To describe regulation of gene expression
To outline the molecular basis of biotechnology and human disease
To have a sound knowledge on both water soluble vitamins and fat soluble vitamins,
with special emphasis on their role in metabolism and diseases caused by their
deficiency.
11. To describe the role played by minerals in dentistry and medicine.
12. To describe the biochemistry of blood with special stress on blood diseases.
1. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching section of
the course every year.
2. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and level of
as prerequisite.
The course is required for all undergraduate 2 nd year BDS students. This course is
designed to equip the students with necessary knowledge of biochemistry that would enable
them to work with proficiency in a hospital environment.
Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Biochemistry II | Page - 62
III.
Topics
Protein Structure and Function
Nitrogen Metabolism
Storage and Expression of Genetic Information
Water soluble vitamins
Fat soluble vitamins
Minerals
Blood
IV.
No. of Weeks
2W
2W
4 W
2W
1W
1W
1W
Topics
Protein Structure and Function
1. Amino acids structure and
classifications
2. Protein structure
3. Globular protein
4. Fibrous protein
5. Enzymes
Nitrogen Metabolism
2. Amino Acids: Disposal of Nitrogen
3. Amino Acid Degradation and
Synthesis
4. Conversion of Amino Acids to
Specialized Products
5. Nucleotide Metabolism
Storage and Expression of Genetic Information
1) DNA Structure, Replication, and Repair
2) RNA Structure, Synthesis and Processing
3) Protein Synthesis
4) Regulation of Gene Expression
5) Biotechnology and Human Disease
a. Restriction Endonucleases
b. DNA Cloning
c. Vectors
d. DNA libraries:
a) Sequencing of cloned DNA
fragments
b) Probes
I)
Hybridization of a probe to
DNA fragments
II)
Synthetic oligonucleotide
probes
e. Southern Blotting
f. Restriction Fragment Length
No. of
Weeks
Date
Contact
hours
1W
12/2/2011
2
½W
½W
1W
26/2/2012
5/3/2011
1
1
2
½W
½W
19/2/2011
½W
12/3/2011
1W
19/3/2011
1W
½W
26/3/2011
2/4/2011
½W
1W
16/4/2011
½W
½W
½W
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
23/4/2011
1
1
Polymorphism
a) Tracing chromosomes from parent
to offspring
b) Prenatal diagnosis
g. Polymerase Chain Reaction
h. Analysis of Gene Expression
i. Gene Therapy
j. Transgenic Animals
Water soluble vitamins
1. Vitamin B1
2. Vitamin B2
3. Niacin
4. Vitamin B6
5. Vitamin B12
6. Folic Acid
7. Biotin
8. Vitamin C
Fat soluble vitamins
1. Vitamin A
2. Vitamin D
3. Vitamin K
4. Vitamin E
Minerals
1. Calcium
2. Phosphorus
3. Sodium
4. Potassium
5. Fluorine
Blood
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Haemoglobin structure
Haem structure and synthesis
Types of normal haemoglobin
Types of abnormal haemoglobin
Porphyrias
Jaundice
Sickle cell anaemia.
Thalassemia
#
1
Practical Topic
Colorimetry
2
½W
½W
30/4/2011
1
1
½W
7/5/2011
½W
14/5/2011
1
½W
½W
21/5/2011
1
1
½W
½W
½W
28/5/2011
½W
½W
Serum Glucose
1
1
1
1
1
4/6/2011
1
Week
2nd W
3rd W
3
Oral Glucose Tolerance Test
4th W
7
Colorimetric Estimation of urea in plasma
8th W
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
Colorimetric Estimation of Cholesterol in the serum
Colorimetric Estimation of Triglycerides in the serum
Creatinine Clearance Test
Colorimetric estimation of uric acid in plasma
Colorimetric estimation of serum proteins
Colorimetric estimation of bilirubin in plasma
Revision
Exam
5th W
6th W
7th W
9th W
10th W
11th W
12th W
13th W
a. Knowledge
1) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
a. At the end of the course the students should be able to understand, recall,
describe(read):
a) The basic processes of life in molecular terms using the cell as a unit of study.
b) The normal and abnormal biochemical processes in man.
c) The impact of the inherited metabolic disorders in medicine.
b. At the end of the course the students should be able to integrate theoretical
knowledge related to biochemistry into clinical practice
2) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
3) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:
2. Matching.
b. Cognitive Skills
1. Demonstrate ability to use biochemical markers of protein, nucleic acids, blood,
vitamins, minerals on working with colleagues, family members, and teacher.
1.
Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of blood and minerals
problems.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills : MCQ
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developed:
Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards medical disorders of the dental
patients.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities: by Direct interactions
with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain: by Use of web based material
related to medical biochemistry of metabolism.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills: by Group tutorial to facilitate
selection & utilization of appropriate web material
Assessment
1
2
3
4
Quiz 1
Quiz 2
Assessment task
Practical
Written exam
Week
due
5th
10th
14th
14th
D. Student Support
Proportion of Final
Assessment
15%
15%
10%
60%
advice.
1. Required Text:
A Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. T. M. Devlin, 6th
Edition, 2006, Wiley- Liss publisher. ISBN 978-0-470-28173-4
2. Essential References:
1) Biochemistry: A Short Course [Deckle Edge]. John L. Tymoczko, Jeremy M.
Berg, Lubert Stryer. 2010, W. H. Freeman and Company publisher. ISBN: 0-71675840-7.
2) Biochemistry, Lippincott’s Illustrated Reviews. Richard Harvey & Denise Ferrier,
5th
Edition,
2010,
ISBN: 9781609139988.
Lippincott
Williams
&
Wilkins
Publisher.
 Pub med.
 Sciencedirect
1. Computing resources as internet.
2. Other resources as PowerPoint
1) Students/teacher focus groups.
2) Students' personal written reflections.
3) Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.
1) Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written
periodical exams.
2) Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal
3) Peer evaluation of the instructor.
1) Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.
2) Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
1) Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty
member in another institution.
2) Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams
3) Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode and
median)
5 T H SEMESTER
THIRD YEAR
CODE
311 MDS
313 MDS
321 RDS
331 PDS
341 SDS
351 DMS
353 DMS
104 ISLM
TOTAL
FIFTH SEMESTER
COURSE TITLE
TH
PR
Oral Biology & Histology II
1
3
Oral Radiology I
1
3
Preclinical Operative
1
6
Dentistry I
Community Dentistry
1
0
Pre-Clinical Removable
1
3
Prosthodontics I
General & Systemic
1
3
Pathology I
Microbiology &
2
3
Immunology
Islamic Culture IV
2
0
8
10
21
CRH
2
2
3
1
2
2
3
2
17
COH
4
4
P-REQ
211 MDS
162 PRE
1
261 DEN
4
254 DMS
7
4
5
2
31
222 RDS
222 RDS
254 DMS
Institution
College
ORAL BIOLOGY & HISTOLOGY II
Jazan University
1
3
Contact hours
2
Credit hours
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Oral Biology & Histology II
311 MDS
2 Credit hours (1+3)
4 contact hours
Dentistry
Prof.Naglaa Nagy
Prof.Amel Radwan El Hak
5th Level
Third Year
106 PRE, 109 PRE; 211 MDS
------
Al-Shawgra
B Objectives






Understand the biological principles and details of the development, structure, and
function of the hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity.
Understand the normal structures of the oral tissues in preparation for courses in oral
pathology and oral medicine.
Macroscopic and microscopic anatomy of the dentition, jaws, oral cavity, salivary glands,
tongue and temporomandibular joint including the nerve and blood supply.
Histological structures of the oral and para-oral tissues of the oral mucous membrane,
salivary glands, TMJ and the maxillary sinus.
Physiological events that occur in the oral cavity, such as; salivation, eruption and
shedding and their clinical considerations.
Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching section of
the course every year.
Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Oral Biology & Histology II | Page - 69

Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and level of
as prerequisite.
The Oral Biology & Histology course II in dentistry covers the development, microscopic
and sub-microscopic structure and functional aspects of hard and soft oral tissues of the
oral cavity. It also relationships between development, structure, and function in the
histology and ultrastructure of oral and paraoral tissues. The course thus serves as a
preparatory course for Oral pathology, Oral medicine,Orthodontics and Periodontics in
the following years. The Oral Biology course will consolidate and augment information
for the following year of study. The basic-bridging knowledge in this course will assist
students in building up learning strategies, approaching and understanding clinical
courses, and add to the student’s ability to clinically evaluate a patient, thus preparing
the student for the courses in clinical sciences.
I.
Topics
Oral Mucous Membrane
Eruption and shedding of teeth
Salivary Glands
Maxillary Sinus
Lymph drain of oral cavity
II.
Topics




No. of Weeks
5
3
2
2
1
1
No. of Weeks
Oral Mucous
Membrane,classification,structure and
function
Eruption and shedding of teeth, structure
and Abnormal behaviour
Salivary Glands, classification, structure and
function.
5
Date
3
2
1
1
Contact
hours
5
3
2
1
1


Maxillary Sinus






1
14
Lab.Practical

1
NO. of. weeks
Oral Mucous
Membrane,classification,structure and
function
Eruption and shedding of teeth, structure
and Abnormal behaviour
Salivary Glands, classification, structure and
function.
Maxillary Sinus
Revision
Date
14
Contact
hours
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
a. Knowledge
(i)
a.9. Describe stages of tooth eruption
a.10.
a.11.
Depict development, structure and function of bone.
Grasp the imperative details of the timed physiological process of
deciduous teeth exfoliation (shedding).
a.12.
Comprehend phases, factors and theories of eruption.
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
a.13.
Name the factors which influence the organizational development of
a.14.
Describe biological features of oral and dental tissue formation which
a.15.
Describe the macro-anatomy, micro-anatomy and ultrastructure of
a.16.
Comprehend the structure and function of different major and minor
a.17.
Recognize the influence of saliva in oral tissues.
a.19.
Depict the macro-anatomy of the maxillary sinus and its relevant to
dental and para-dental tissue.
helps in diagnosis and treatment of oral diseases.
various regions of oral mucosa and the significance of its regional variations.
salivary glands.
a.18.
Depict the macro-anatomy and micro-anatomy of the TMJ.
dental practice.
a.20.
List structural changes and mechanisms involved in craniofacial
development and growth.
(ii)
(iii)
6. Matching.
b. Cognitive Skills
a.9. Illustrate the significance of different stages of tooth development.
a.10.
Develop recognition of physiological process of tooth formation.
a.12.
Develop recognition of different stages of tooth development
a.11.
a.13.
a.14.
Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts of tooth function.
Demonstrate the importance of the tooth attachment apparatus.
Depict the affiliation of different parts of the dental structure
1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of abnormal developmental
problems.
1. MCQ
c.1. Summarize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to
Oral Biology.
c.2. Distinguish and evaluate normal dental and para-dental structure which helps
in diagnosis of diseases
c.3. Asses and interpret information from various Oral Biology sources.
c.4. Specify appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using
normal oral structure and function.
c.5. Develop a reasoned argument to common and uncommon problems relevant
to Oral Biology.
e.1. Recognize function related to structure of oral tissues.
e.2. Demonstrate deviation in ordinary appearance of soft and hard dental tissues.
e.3. Respond to environmental changes inside and outside craniofacial region.
e.4. Plan, design, record, execute and communicate an independent research using
Oral Biology media and techniques.
Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material
Assignments
Assessment
Assessment task
Week
Proportion of Final
1
Quiz 1
3
2
Quiz 2
4
Written exam
D. Student Support
due
Assessment
10th
20%
5th
-----14th
10%
10%
60%
advice.
1. Required Text:
2. Oral Histology: Development, Structure, and Function by A. R. Ten Cate. 2008
Essential References:
1. Orban's Oral Histology & Embryology by Bhaskar. 2006.
2. Essentials of Oral Histology and Embryology: A Clinical Approach (Avery, Essentials of
Oral Histology and Embryology) by James K. Avery and Daniel J. Chiego. 2005.
3. Essentials of Oral Biology: Oral Anatomy, Histology, Physiology and Embryology by M.
Jose. 2008.
4. Craniofacial Sutures: Development, Disease and Treatment (Frontiers of Oral Biology)
by David P. Rice. 2008.
5. Comparative Dental Morphology: Selected Papers of the 14th International Symposium
on Dental Morphology. 2008.
6. Greifswald, Germany (Frontiers of Oral Biology) by T. Koppe, G. Meyer, K. W. Alt, and A.
Brook. 2009.
7. Oral Anatomy, Histology and Embryology by Barry K B Berkovitz BDS MSc PhD FDS
(ENG), G. R. Holland BSc BDS PhD CERT ENDO, and Bernard J Moxham. 2009.



Medicare web Site.
Pub med.
Sciencedirect
1. Internet.
3. Other resources
1. PowerPoint
exams.
by the department.
median)
ORAL RADIOLOGY I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Year/Semester at which course offered
Pre-requisites for the course
Co-requisites for the course
Location if not main campus
Jazan University
Oral Radiology 1, 313 MDS
2
Dentistry
Prof Ebtessam Elzefzaf
Dr Sameena parveen
Dr Reda Sabra
Dr Tenny John
3rd Year | 5thSemester
162 PRE
-Shawajra campus
B. Objectives
At the end of the course the students should:
1. Know the basic characteristics of ionizing radiation and production of X-rays.
2. Identify the structure of the dental x-ray machine and the functions of each part.
3. Understand the Biological effects of ionizing radiation on the molecular, cellular, tissue
and organ levels with concentration on the hazardous effects of ionizing radiation on the
oral and paraoral structures.
4. Practice adequate measures for radiation protection of the patient, dental staff and
people in the immediate environment.
5. Understand the Principles of image production and characteristics of
radiographic images.
6. Recognize the different types of radiographic films which are utilized in oral and
maxillofacial imaging including basic composition of the radiographic film as well as
different types of films according to their size and speed.
7. Know the interaction between X-rays and matter, the effect of X-rays on the
radiographic film and the factors affecting radiographic image qualities.
8. Master the processing of the exposed films in order to produce good quality diagnostic
radiographs by both manual as well as automatic film processing.
9. Understand well the interaction between the film and the processing solutions.
10. Identify common causes of faulty or unsatisfactory radiographs.
11. Identify Normal radiological landmarks on the periapical and occlusal radiographs.
12. Master the techniques for acquiring good quality intra oral radiographs, namely
Periapical, bitewing and Occlusal.
13. Understand the principles of radiographic interpretation.
Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Oral Radiology I | Page - 76
The use of x-rays is an essential part of clinical dentistry. As a result, radiographs are often
referred to as the clinician main diagnostic aid. Dental Radiology is a branch of dentistry dealing
with the complete examination of the oral cavity needs both clinical and radiographic
investigations, therefore this course of dental radiology offers the way of examining the hidden
parts of teeth and their supporting structures. The range of knowledge of dental radiography
and radiology required can be divided conveniently into four main sections: Basic physics and
equipment, Radiography techniques, Radiation protection, Radiological interpretation. This
course is considered as an introductory course that includes lectures, demonstrations and
practical applications on the previously given lectures. It is consisted of a series of weekly
lectures and practical covered in the fifth Semester of third year.
I.
Topics
LECTURES
Introduction & Radiation Physics
 Nature and properties of X-ray
 Principles of X-ray production
 Types of radiation
 Components of X-ray machine
 Factors controlling the X-ray beam
 Interactions of X-Rays with Matter
Radiation biology
 Interaction between ionizing radiation and living mater The direct effect
 The indirect effects
 Radiation effect on living tissues
 Radiation effects on oral and para oral structures
Radiation protection
 Exposure and Dose in Radiography
 Units of radiation measurements
 Maximum permissible dose
 Methods of exposure and dose reduction.
 Radiation protection of the patient.
 Radiation protection of the personnel.
 The ALARA concept of radiation protection
X-ray film, intensifying screens, grids
 Types of films
 Intra-oral films
 Extra- oral films
 Film composition
 Film speed and quality
 Intensifying screens
 Grids
No. of
Weeks
Contact
hours
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Intra-oral Radiographic techniquesTechnique, principles, indications, advantages and disadvantages of:
Periapical radiography
 Paralleling technique
 Bisecting the angle technique
Bitewing radiography
Occlusal radiography
Processing techniques
 Formation of the image
 Composition and function of the developing solution
 Composition and function of the fixing solution
 Manual and automatic film processing.
Faulty Radiographs
Causes of unsatisfactory radiographs
 How to avoid them.
Normal radiographic anatomy
 Maxillary
 Mandibular
Principles of radiographic interpretation
Course Component - Practical
Topics
PRACTICAL
Radiation Physics

4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No. of
Weeks
2
Contact
hours
6
Identification and labeling the parts of the dental x-ray
machine.
 Factors controlling the X-ray beam
Radiation Protection
1




Conduct of Examination
Methods of radiation protection
Use of leaded aprons and collars.
Demonstration of Position –and- Distance rule
1
Imaging principles and technique
 Demonstration of X-ray film, intensifying screens & grids used
in radiography
Intra-oral Radiographic techniques, principles, indications, 7
advantages and disadvantages.
 Practical application of imaging principles in intra oral
radiography.
 Demonstration of size and shape distortion with change in
projection geometry.
 Practical exercises demonstrating the effect of X-rays on the
radiographic film and factors affecting radiographic image
quality.
3
3
21

Training in various techniques for acquiring intra oral
radiographs, - Periapical, bitewing and Occlusal.
 Practical application of object localization techniques.
Processing of X-ray films
 Students will be made familiar dark room and the methods of
film processing.
 Processing of the exposed films in order to produce
consistently good quality diagnostic radiographs by both
manual and automatic film processing.
Demonstration of normal radiographic anatomy.
2
Course Component - Practical
Lectures
13
II.
III.
Tutorials
Internship
3 hours/week
6
Others
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Lectures to
By the end of this course, the present the
students will be able to:
main areas and
Comprehend the basic principles demonstration
of ionizing radiation as a s to emphasise
form of energy.
the concepts.
Understand the physics behind Group
the basic theories of ionizing discussions
radiation: the wave theory
and the quantum theory.
Be familiar with the properties of
x-rays and its interaction
with matter.
Discuss the mechanism of x rays
production within the x ray
tube and those factors
which affect the quality of Demonstration
the produced X ray beam.
s to integrate
Identify the basic components of the physics
the dental X ray machine and
and concepts of
the functions of its parts as
well the operation of such projection
geometry with
machines.
Understand the geometry of the actual
image production, the image radiographic
Method of
Assessment
MCQs , and
viva voce
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
characteristics and possible
faults and artifacts which
might occur while making
those radiographic images.
Master the two techniques of
periapical
radiography
“paralleling and bisecting
angle techniques" as well as
bitewing
and
occlusal
radiography of maxillary
and mandibular teeth with
its different modifications.
Identify the causes for faulty
radiographs
Have a thorough knowledge of
radiopaque and radiolucent
normal
anatomical
landmarks of the maxilla and
mandible.
procedure.
Work efficiently and effectively as
a team.
Building good spirit.
Radiation safety procedures
should be understood and
followed by all.
Group
Assignment
The students should demonstrate Practical and
the ability of professional
Demonstration
judgment in patient selection for
s
radiographic examination.
They should also demonstrate the
ability to request appropriate
choice of technique, equipment
and operation of the equipment.
Students should be aware of the
hazards of radiation and be alert
all the time so as not to put theirs
or others health at risk.
Sense of perception to assess the
image quality of the processed
radiograph.
Close
supervision
of the
students
while
performing
radiographic
procedures.
Develop Excellent
Communication skills with wide
range of individuals.
Utilize information and
technology as means of learning,
communication, data collection.
Assignments.
Group tutorials
for utilization
of appropriate
web based
radiology
material.
One to one
student
teacher
direct
interaction.
e. Psychomotor
skills
Make verbal and written
presentations using appropriate
audio visual aids.
Illustrate the placement of the
film, film holder, positionindicating device and central ray
in paralleling and bisecting the
angle technique.
Illustrate the processing of the
exposed films by both manual as
well as automatic film processer.
Audio visual
demonstration
of different
radiographic
techniques.
IV.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
MCQ’s I
40%
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Written Exam
Final term exam
60%
Practical Exam
Oral Exam
Step by step
evaluation to
ensure that
the student
has mastered
each
procedure
before
proceeding
to next step.
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
30%
20%
10%
D. Students support
1. Oral Radiology: Principles and Interpretation by Stuart C. White DDS PhD and Michael J.
Pharoah. 2008.
2. Exercises in Oral Radiology and Interpretation by Robert P. Langlais. 2003.
3. Eric Whates: Essenetials of dental Radiography and Radiology, 3rd edition, Elsevier
science 2003.
4. Haring and Jansen Howerton: Dental Radiography: principles and Techniques, 3rd
Edition, saunders, 2006.
5. Master Dentistry: Volume 1: Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Radiology, Pathology and
Oral Medicine by Paul Coulthard, Keith Horner, Philip Sloan, and Elizabeth D. Theaker.
2008.
a. Accommodation
 Phantom Head Labs for 40-60 students
c. Other resources
department:



improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRECLINICAL OPERATIVE DENTISTRY I
1. Institution:
2. College:
Dentistry
Preclinical
operative
Dentistry I, 321 RDS
3(1+2)
Dentistry
f.
222 RDS
b. Credit hours
course
Dr Syed Nahid Basheer
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
3rd Year /5th Semester
shawajrah
--
B. Objectives
After completion of the course the students should:
1- Identify the factors that influence operative dentistry both today and in the future
2- Identify and classify carious lesions
3- Know the aims, objectives and terminologies of operative dentistry
4- Classify and describe the tooth preparation
5- Understand the principles of Tooth Preparation and the various steps involved in it
6- Possess the appropriate theoretical and practical knowledge of Hand and rotary cutting
Instruments
7- Apply the concepts of class I Amalgam cavity preparation
8- Know the applied aspects of glass ionomer cement
9- Know the applied aspects of composite resin material
Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Preclinical operative dentistry I | Page - 84
This course is provided by the department of Restorative dental sciences during the first
semester of the third year. The course consists of two parts, theory and practicals, in which the
former includes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes the application of the
theory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessions
The course is given as one lecture and two lab sessions per week for the whole semester and
will have three credit hours, and seven contact hours.
In this course the students will be trained to Identify and classify carious lesions , know how to
manipulate operative instruments, apply the concepts of class I & V Amalgam cavity
preparation on artificial teeth, manipulate restorative materials like composite and glass
ionomer cement. and apply rubber dam on the manikin.
LECTURES
SI NUM
Topics
1
Introduction to Operative Dentistry
No.
of Contact
credit
hours
hrs
1
1
3
Fundamentals of tooth preparation
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
Cariology-1
Hand cutting instruments & instrumentation
Rotary Cutting Instruments & instrumentation
Class I Amalgam Cavity Preparation & restoration
Introduction to glass ionomer restorations
Introduction to composite restorations
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
SI
NUM
1
PRACTICALS
2
Identification, and arrangement of hand cutting 1
instruments.
drawing and labelling of hand cutting instruments
3
3
2
2
1
1
No.
of Contact
credit hrs hours
Introduction & Orientation to the phantom lab and 1
3
Demonstration of ergonomics.
Identification and description of hand pieces and burs
1
3
3
drawing and labelling of rotary cutting instruments
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
Application of Rubber dam on maxillary & Mandibular 2
Teeth on manikin
6
Restoration of various Class I cavities with amalgam
restorative material in the artificial posterior teeth
5
15
Restoration of Class V cavities with Amalgam restorative
material on artificial posterior teeth
2
6
2
6
Preparation of various Class I cavity designs for Amalgam 7
restoration in the artificial posterior teeth
21
preparation of Class V cavity designs for
restoration in the artificial posterior teeth
9
Restoration of class v cavities with glass ionomer cement
Restoration of cavities with composite resin restorative 4
material in posterior teeth
I.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13 credit hrs
-----II.
Amalgam 3
Practical
28 credit hrs
12
Others
------
III.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Identify dental
Explanation
caries and its
utilising Microsoft
classification
power point
including pictures
Recognize the
Explanations by
fundamentals of
drawing pictures
cavity preparation
in all tooth
Interactions with
surfaces for
the students to
Amalgam
explain
the
concepts taught to
develop
self
interest
and
competition
Recognize and
among the fellow
Method
of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments
and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P)
&
Final
examination(T/P)
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology
Numerical skills
describe different
instrument used
in Operative
Dentistry
Students
will
develop
good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
concentration,
perception
and
nevertheless
memory all of
which leading to
understanding,
recollection,
reproduction
of
the
taught
concepts
(both
theoretical
and
practical) at any
given time.
& The students are
encouraged
to
have an attitude
for commitment to
succeed in the
field, work well
with the fellow
students
and
maintain
good
relationship with
staff
members,
with
responsibility
towards finishing
all assignments on
time.
Know the basics
& of communication
and information
technology, utilise
these skills the
best way possible
in
their
assignment
students
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
some parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Continuous
assessment in the
form of Quizzes &
Midterm
examination
The students are
always encouraged
to the best in
friendly way, and
assignments
are
given deadlines to
be submitted.
Assignments
on
theoretical aspects
that is delivered at
a required time
The students are
guided to carry out
web based search
and encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining
to
operative dentistry
and
actively
involve
in
circulating
the
Evaluate
their
method
of
collection of
e-based facts &
Assessment of the
method
and
duration of time
involving the same.
Practical
demonstrations of
what have been
taught
theoretically
2.Final
examinationTheory/Practical
Assessment by the
staff members on
their behaviour and
attendance
practical
requirement are
set at a definite Issuing deadlines
number
on
a
given
assignment
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
colleagues
and
staff members.
The students will
have
continuous
assessment on the
critical evaluation practical work and
of the work done the students are
in
constructive expected to fulfil
manner
the requirements
able to handle
set.
engine
driven adjuncts in the
rotary
form of lectures or
instrumentation in illustrative
a proper and safe diagrams,
way
lab sessions on
proper use of artificial teeth.
amalgam material
use
the
instruments
required
to
perform
cavity
preparation
Live
demonstrations
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Mid term practical
exam
Mid term written exam
60%
Final Practical Exam
Final Written Exams
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
30%
30%
1- Students support
a- Dr Syed Nahid Basheer
b- Dr Abbas Rizvi
2- Learning resources
1. Fundamentals of Operative Dentistry: A Contemporary Approach by James B. Summitt, J.
William Robbins, Thomas J. Hilton, and Richard S. Schwartz. 2006.
2. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art and
Science of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and Edward
J. Swift. 2006.
3. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.
4. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, Leean
Morrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.
5. Pickard's Manual of Operative Dentistry (Oxford Medical Publications) by Edwina A. M.
Kidd, Bernard G. N. Smith, and Timothy F. Watson. 2003.
3- Facilities required
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
4- Course evaluation and improvement processes
department:



improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.

Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferable
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
COMMUNITY DENTISTRY
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
c. Program in which the course is offered
d. Name(s) of the faculty member(s) responsible for the
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Year/semester at which the course is offered
Location (if not main campus)
Jazan University
Community Dentistry,
331 PDS
1
Dentistry
Dr Aadil Inamdar
Dr Kaushik Sengupta
Dr Santosh Kumar
Tadakamandla
3rd Year/5th Semester
261 DEN
–
Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives
After completion of the course, the students should be able to:











Define dental public health and describe the role of the dental professional in the health
care community
Identify the broad socio-environmental determinants of health
Demonstrate an awareness of health and social inequalities
Discuss the importance of the primary health care approach in promoting public health
Describe the current dental care delivery system in Saudi Arabia as well as those in the US,
UK, and Canada
Describe the role of the government in public health service at the country, provincial, and
local levels
Discuss the strategies and approaches to oral health promotion and disease prevention
Describe the principles of oral health needs assessment and identify the needs of a target
population through appropriate assessment techniques
Discuss the social, economic, and other factors that influence the utilization of dental
services
Describe the general principles of planning, management, and evaluation of health care
programs
Identify the legal, professional, and ethical issues affecting dental care
Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Community Dentistry | Page - 91
While dentistry mostly deals with a patient’s individual requirements, community dentistry
or dental public health targets the community as a whole. The Community Dentistry course
seeks to develop an understanding of the basic concepts of dental public health, including
the broader social and environmental determinants of health; primary health care;
organization of dental health services; oral health promotion and disease prevention; oral
health needs assessment; and planning, implementation, and evaluation of communitybased dental programs. A brief introduction to professional ethics is provided; further, the
currently accepted standards of conduct and behavior for members of the dental profession
and the legal system and its role and application to the practice of dentistry are discussed.
The course material is presented from the perspective of the community with local and
international examples. The goal is to equip dental health professionals with skills such that
they can appropriately deal with the ever-changing trends in dentistry; analyze and solve
environmental, social, and economic issues related to oral health; and practice and develop
oral health promotion and prevention strategies at the individual and community levels.
The course consists of didactic lectures, case presentations, and discussion sessions.
II.
Topics
Introduction to public health and dental public health
Definitions; determinants of health and oral health
Primary health care
Concepts of health, diseases & prevention
Health promotion and oral health education
Levels of Prevention of dental diseases
Demand, need, access, and utilization of oral health services
Ethics and jurisprudence
Program planning and evaluation
Overview of health care systems
Organization of health and dental services in Saudi Arabia
and abroad (US, UK, and Canada)
Nutrition and Oral Health
Health Agencies of the world
Financing of Dental care
III.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14
–
No. of weeks
1
Contact hours
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
–
IV. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semester
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
Others
–
V. Development of learning outcomes in different domains of learning
Skills
Description
Teaching strategies
a. Knowledge
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal
skills and
responsibilities
d. Communication,
information
technology, and
numerical skills
Method of
assessment
 Comprehensive
understanding and
knowledge of
community dental
health
 Understanding of
the integration of
the principles of
preventive dentistry
with other dental
specialties
the areas of current
research and
development in
dental public health
 Provision of
extensive learning
notes and
materials to
students
 Seminars
 Guided reading
 Examinations
 Continuous takehome assignments
 Quizzes
 Monthly assignment
report
 Written assignment
report
 Taking
responsibilities
 Communicating
effectively with
patients and
colleagues
 Continuous
professional
development
 Presentation skills
 Practical
implementation of
evidence-based
dentistry
 Identification of the
best available
evidence for
answering clinical
 Class projects from
students
 Seminars from
students
 Written
assignments from
students
 Student teaching
materials
 Problem-based
learning exercises
 Group discussions
 Seminar
presentations
 Group projects
 Continuous
assessment
 Written
examinations
 Evaluation of
seminar
presentation
 Student-led
teaching materials
 Use of software
such as EndNote
 Use of Microsoft
Power Point and
other presentation
platforms and

 Application of the
concepts and
principles of
preventive dentistry
and dental public
health


Continuous
assessment
Assessment of
software
proficiency
Written
examinations




e. Psychomotor
skills
VI.
questions in
dentistry
Appropriate
computer skills for
undertaking
literature searches
and for preparing
scientific documents
Effective
communication
(both written and
oral)
Use of information
technology in
academics and
research
Presentation skills
–
methods
 Use of information
and
communication
technology
–
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
Continuous assessment
40%
Quiz II
Midterm written exam
Oral exam (viva voce)
60%
Final written exam
(open book)
D. Student support
Faculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:
Consultations: 2 h per week
Academic advice: 2 h per week
–
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
20%
40%
1. Essential Dental Public Health by Blanaid Daly, Richard G. Watt, Paul Batchelor, and
Elizabeth T. Treasure. Oxford University Press, 2002.
2. Dentistry, Dental Practice, and the Community (sixth edition) by Brian A. Burt and Steven
A. Eklund. Saunders, 2005.
3. Principles of Dental Public Health (fourth edition) by James M. Dunning. Harvard
University Press, 1986.
4. Concepts in Dental Public Health (second edition) by Jill Mason. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2010.
5. Developing Practice for Public Health and Health Promotion (third edition) by Jennie
Naidoo and Jane Wills. Bailliere Tindall, 2010.
6. Community Oral Health by Cynthia M. Pine and Rebecca Harris. Quintessence Publishing,
2007.
7. Dental Public Health: An Introduction to Community Dental Health (second edition) by
Geoffrey L. Slack and Brian A. Burt. Butterworth-Heinemann, 1981.
8. Jong’s Community Dental Health (fifth edition) by George M. Gluck and Warren M.
Morganstein. Mosby, 2002.
9. Primary Preventive Dentistry (seventh edition) by Norman O. Harris, Franklin GarciaGodoy, and Christine N. Nathe. Prentice Hall, 2008.
10. Textbook of Preventive Dentistry (second edition) by Richard E. Stallard. W.B. Saunders,
1982.
11. Outlines & Highlights for Dentistry, Dental Practice, and the Community by Burt, ISBN:
0721673090 (Cram101 Textbook Outlines) (fifth edition) by Cram101 Textbook Reviews.
Academic Internet PUBLISHERS Inc. (AIPI), 2006.
a. Accommodation
 Lecture rooms for 40 to 60 students
 Laboratories for 40 to 60 students
 Computers with access to the Internet
 Institutional membership-based access to medical literature databases (including
Medline) and reputed and relevant online journals
 Software: Microsoft Office and EndNote
c. Other resources
a. Strategies for obtaining student feedback on the effectiveness of teaching
 Teacher-student discussion, focus groups
 Student surveys on the effectiveness of teaching
b. Other strategies for evaluation of the effectiveness of teaching by the instructor or by the
department
 Monitoring student performance and progress through periodic examinations and
assessments
 Feedback, self-appraisal, and intra-departmental discussions on the effectiveness of
teaching
 Peer evaluations
c. Processes for the improvement of teaching
 Identifying and evaluating areas of weaknesses and working on their improvement
 Continuing dental education programs
 Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling
d. Processes for verifying standards of student achievement
 Random sampling and checking of examination papers by the Examination
Committee
 Evaluation and assessment of students’ examination reports
 Re-evaluating a sample assignment by internal and external faculty members
 Evaluation of student performance and examination reports as a whole
e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course
Review
 Semesterly and yearly reviews of student performance in all teaching areas
 Review of feedback for planning and improvement of transferable skills
 Review of feedback on the level of retention of required knowledge from faculty
teaching courses that demand this course as a pre-requisite
 External benchmarking of student performance with that of other similar institutes
Planning
 Curriculum and syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and
requirements
 Review and feedback for teachers for planning improvement strategies
 Provision of additional training for staff as and when required
 Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies
 Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to fine-tune the course in line with
international standards
6 T H SEMESTER
THIRD YEAR
CODE
312 MDS
314 MDS
315 MDS
322 RDS
332 PDS
342 SDS
352 DMS
354 DMS
TOTAL
SIXTH SEMESTER
COURSE TITLE
TH
PR
Oral Pathology I
1
3
Oral Radiology II
2
3
Anaesthesia & Exodontia
1
3
1
6
Dentistry II
Epidemiology &
1
0
Biostatistics
Pre-Clinical Removable
1
3
Prosthodontics II
General & Systemic
1
3
Pathology II
Pharmacology
2
0
8
10
21
CRH
2
3
2
3
1
2
2
2
17
COH
4
5
4
P-REQ
311 MDS
313 MDS
252 DMS
1
331 PDS
7
4
4
2
31
321 RDS
341 SDS
351 DMS
256 DMS
Institution
College
ORAL PATHOLOGY I
Jazan University
Course Title
Oral Pathology I
Code
312 MDS
Credit Hours
2
Year/Semester at which the course is
offered
Pre-Requisites for the course
3rd year/6th Semester
Oral Biology& Histology II
311 MDS
Program in which the course is offered Dentistry
Name of faculty member
responsible for the course
Dr. Sanaa Saleh
Al Shawajrah campus
B. Objectives




Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology is the dental speciality and discipline of pathology that
deals with the nature, identification and management of wide variety of diseases
affecting the Oral and Maxillofacial regions. The diagnosis and treatment of these
diseases comprise an essential part of the practice of dentistry.
The objective of this course is to provide the comprehensive information needed to
identify and manage oral abnormalities, diseases/conditions in the clinical practice in
which the students will be involved after graduation.
The course provides a complete understanding of the pathologic causes, pathogenesis,
processes, effects and prognosis of these diseases.
The course enhances diagnostic skills through the use of clinical, radiographic,
microscopic, biochemical or other examinations and the development of differential
diagnosis for similar diseases.
This course is offered during the 6th semester of the third year and the 7th semester of
the fourth year and has four credit hours. The course combines lecture presentations with
practical, including microscopic laboratory sessions and clinicopathologic conferences (CPC)
arranged in such way that the practical and the CPC sessions are correlated with the subject
topics covered in the didactic lectures. Students involved in this course are expected to integrate
and correlate knowledge concerning clinical, radiographical and microscopic features; utilising
them in obtaining the diagnosis of oral and maxillofacial diseases.
I.
Topics to be covered in Oral Pathology I
Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Oral Pathology I | Page - 98
Topics
Introduction, principles of investigation and diagnosis
 Introduction
 Principles of investigation and diagnosis
Developmental defects of oral and maxillofacial region
 Developmental defects of the face
 Developmental defects of the tongue
 Developmental defects of the jaws
Developmental Defects of the teeth
 Environmental alterations of teeth
 Developmental alterations in the number of teeth
 Developmental alterations in the size of teeth
 Developmental alterations in the shape of teeth
 Developmental alterations in the structure of teeth
Dental caries
 Definition and epidemiology
 Radiographic features
 Classification
 Histopathological features
 Protective mechanisms (dentinal reactions)
 Etiology of dental caries
Pulp diseases
 Pulpitis
 Secondary dentin
 Pulp calcfications
Periapical lesions
 Periapical granuloma (chronic apical periodontitis)
 Acute apical periodontitis
 Periapical abscess
 Spread of dental infection
 Osteomyelitis
Periodontal diseases
Cysts of the jaws and oral soft tissues
 Odontogenic Cysts
 Non-odontogenic developmental (fissural Cysts)
 Non epitheliated bone cysts
 Cysts of the soft tissues
Bacterial, viral and mycotic diseases
 Bacterial infections
 Viral Infections
 Fungal and Protozoal Infections
Allergic and immunologic diseases
Physical and chemical injuries
Revision
II.
Number of
weeks
1st w
Contact
hours
2
2nd w
2
3rd w
2
4th, 5th w
4
6th w
2
7th w
2
8th w
9th, 10th w
2
4
11th, 12th w
4
13th w
14th w
2
1
1
Course Component
Lectures
Lectures 14
Tutorials
Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others
100 minutes for microscopic
20 minutes will
lab per week
III.
be used for CPC
&/or assignment
presentation.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
a) To know the common clinical features and signs and symptoms of lesions originating
from soft and hard tissues of oral and paraoral region.
b) To recognize the pathologic changes of oral and maxillofacial lesions at both
macroscopic and microscopic levels.
c) To know the current concepts of oral and maxillofacial pathology.
d) To understand the contemporary theories on disease etiology, pathogenesis, processes,
prognosis and current therapeutic regimens.
e) To know the use of special diagnostic laboratory investigations and staining methods
such as immunohistochemistry.
a) Data show lectures are given.
b) Written assignment will be requested from students.
c) Referral to different textbooks for specific items for private study/learning hours.
(iii)
Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
a) Assignment evaluation, discussion and scoring
b) Short quizzes
c) Written examinations including Short Answers, Essay, Definitions,
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
a) This course forms a bridge between the didactic histopathological aspects of oral
pathology and the practical clinical radiographic and analytical considerations.
b) The student should develop the ability to correlate clinical and radiographic features to
the concomitant histopathological changes and analyse data in a comprehensive way.
c) Students should acquire the capability for differentiating similar oral diseases.
d) Students should be able to interpret the microscopic features and to make
histopathological diagnosis.
a) Clinico-pathologic conference (CPC) including case histories, clinical and microscopic
slides using data show is given.
b) Students interpret, compare, contrast, discuss and correlate clinical and radiographic
data to the histopathologic features, differentiate and delineate similar lesions and
reach final diagnosis.
c) Students will be exposed during the practical sessions to the histopathological changes
associated with almost all the oral lesions
a)
b)
c)
d)
Continuous laboratory assessment
CPC- discussion, and evaluation
Written examination will include multiple choice questions.
Practical examination will include spot diagnosis for histopathological features using
glass slides in addition to case histories, using clinical and microscopic slides presented
by data show
a) Students respect academic clinical staff and peers
b) Students describe the importance of different points of view and team work
c) Each group will be responsible to present and discuss the selected topic.
a) Students are divided into groups; each group is requested to make power point
presentation about selected topic related to the didactic ones.
Student works with others and interacts with team.
b) Students will be guided, supervised by an advisor staff member
c) Students should make comprehensive presentation for the topic.
a) Staff members will discuss and evaluate the presentation for each group
d. Numerical and Communication Skills
a) Use of web based material related to oral pathology to appraise the
date concept of oral diseases
advanced or up to
b) Students will be requested to find out the prevalence of the lesion in their written
assignment (hospital-based)
(i) Description of the numerical and communication skills to be developed

Communicate with responsible people, and search to find out the prevalence of the
lesion of interest in their written assignment
a) Recommend students to contact person in charge in University hospital, and/or Ministry
of health central pathology lab
b) Revise the national cancer registry for any useful information
a) Evaluate their assignment by staff members
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance required
a) Familiarize students with microscope adjustments
b)
Instructions and continuous supervision during student usage of microscope
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
a) Microscopic laboratory exam
V.
Scheduling of Assessment Tasks for Students during the semester
Assessment Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
40%
1
Written assignment & presentation
2
3
4
Quizzes
Mid term
Attendance and
Evaluation of the practical note
1
Final practical Examination
Spot diagnosis of glass slides
CPC Examination
2
Final written Examination
Total
Week due
Proportion
5%
3, 5,9 and 11
10%
1-15
5%
7th
60%
100%
15
15
D. Students support
Consultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/week
20%
10%
10%
40%
 Essential Text Book and Atlas
- Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology
Neville BW, Damn DD, Allen CM & Bouquot JE
3rd ed, 2008
WB Saunders Co.
-
-
-

-
-
-
-
-
-
Oral Pathology – Clinical Pathologic Correlation
Regezi JA, Sciubba JJ & Jordan RCK
5th ed, 2008
WB Saunders Co.
Cawson’s Essentials of Oral Pathology and Oral Medicine
Cawson RA and Odell EW
8th ed, 2008
Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier,
London, New York, Oxford, Philadelphia.
Color Atlas of Oral Diseases, Clinical and Pathologic Correlations
Cawson, Bennie, Barrett & Wright
Latest Edition
Recommended Text Book and Atlas
Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology: A rational for diagnosis and treatment
Robert E Marx, Diane Stern
1st ed, 2002
Quintessence Publishing Co.
Contemporary Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology
Sapp JP, Eversole LR, Wysock GP
2nd ed, 2003
Mosby Co. St Louis
Oral Pathology
Soames JV and Southam JC
4th ed, 2005
Oxford
Text book of Oral Pathology
Shafer
Latest Edition
WB Saunders Co.
Color Atlas of clinical Oral Pathology
Neville, Damm, White, Waldron
2nd ed, 1999
William and Wilkins, Baltimore.
A Color Atlas of Orofacial Diseases
W.R.Tyldesley
-

Latest Edition
Wolfe
A color Atlas of Oral Pathology
Lee
Latest edition
Wolfe
Color Atlas of Common Oral Diseases
Robert P. Langlais, Craig S Miller, Jill S Nield-Gehrig, 2009.
Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov
http://www.sciencedirect.com/
http://www.ada.org
 Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Interactive Atlas of Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology (CD-ROM)
1. Accommodation
 Lecture rooms with a seating capacity for 40-60 students 2 hours/week for
lectures.
 Labs with 40-60 light binocular microscopes (each one has 4 augmentation x4,
x10, x20, and x40) 2 hours/week for practical scissions.
 A laptop with a projector for power point presentations
 Computers with online access to data bases ( internet and related scientific
publications)
 Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals.
3. Other resources
 Oral Histopathology adequately equipped laboratory
1. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:
 Confidential student’s personal written feedbacks
2. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the department:
 Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodic examinations
and assessments exercises.
3. Processes for improvement of teaching:




By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on its improvement.
Regular feedback to staff members
4. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:
 Random sampling and checking exam papers by examination committee
 Periodic exchange for advisory staff member
 Remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another
institution
 Quizzes conducted as a part of continuous assessment
 Small group student’s presentation and discussion in the lab under faculty
supervision
 Evaluation of collective students’ performance, tutors and examination reports
as a whole
5. Arrangements for periodical review and effective planning for the course improvement:
Review:
 Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching fields.
 Reviewing feedbacks from colleagues and students for planning and
improvement of transferable skills.
 Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge from
faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.
 Comparing student’s performance benchmark with other similar institutes
teaching similar course and working on its improvement.
Planning:
 Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and requirements.
 Periodic feedback from colleagues and students for planning improvement
strategies.
 Provide additional training for staff as where and when required.
1. Institution:
2. College:
ORAL RADIOLOGY II
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Jazan University
Oral Radiology II, 314 MDS
3
Dentistry
Prof Ebtessam Elzefzaf
Dr Sameena parveen
Dr Reda Sabra
Dr Tenny John
3rd Year | 6thSemester
313 MDS
- Shawajra campus
B. Objectives











Be thorough with the Radiographic interpretation of dental caries, periodontal and
periapical-pathosis.
Know the Radiographic appearance of various dental anomalies and trauma to the teeth.
Know the principles and applications of digital radiography and its uses in the field of
Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology.
Understand the Principles, indications, advantages and disadvantages of panoramic
radiography and steps in taking a panoramic radiograph.
Describe the advanced imaging modalities, their uses in the head and neck including CT,
MRI, Ultrasound and nuclear medicine.
Differentiate between various types of inflammatory lesions of jaws and their clinical
and radiographic features,
Differentiate between odontogenic and non odontogenic cysts, common benign
odontogenic and non odontogenic tumors, and malignant lesions.
Students should know radiological interpretation of different types of bone diseases that
have jaw manifestations, soft tissue calcifications.
Should have knowledge on radiological interpretation of fractures of the jaws and facial
bones, their systemic disease and syndromes manifested in the jaws.
Demonstrate sound knowledge on different radiographic technique used to examine
TMJ, disorders affecting the TMJ, maxillary sinus anatomy, technique used to examine
sinus.
Have sound knowledge of imaging of salivary glands, and the radiographic appearance
of the most common diseases affecting them.
Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Oral Radiology II | Page - 106
This course is in continuation of the introductory course which is Oral Radiology I and
includes radiographic interpretation of various pathological lesions that aid in diagnosis
treatment planning and management of patients. It also includes extraoral radiographic
projections and advanced imaging modalities. This course also provides a basic introduction
to implant radiology.
This course includes lectures, demonstrations and practical applications on the previously
given lectures. It consists of a series of weekly lectures and practical covered in the sixth
Semester of third year.
The course is taught over one semester and carries three credit hours. In addition to all this
the student should write a detailed report about all the abnormalities identified on the
radiograph prescribed.
I.
LECTURE - Topics
Radiographic appearance of dental caries, periodontal disease
and Periapical Disease
Panoramic radiography
 Principles of Panoramic Image
 Formation, panoramic machine, patient positioning,
radiographic appearance of normal anatomy
Extra oral radiographic techniques
 Skull projections : Posterioanterior projection, lateral
skull projection, lateral cephalometric projection,
Waters' projection, reverse-towne's projection,
submentovertex projection, Mandibular Oblique
Lateral Projections
Dental Anomalies and Developmental disturbances of face
and jaws
Trauma to the teeth and facial structure
Inflammatory Diseases
Cyst of the jaws
Tumors of the jaws
Disease of Bone manifesting in Jaw bones
Systemic diseases manifesting in jaw bones
Salivary gland radiology
Advanced imaging modalities
 Digital imaging, Computed tomography, magnetic
resonance imaging, Nuclear medicine,
Ultrasonography
Temperomandibular joint imaging
Orofacial Implant Radiology
 Radiographic Assessment of Dental implants, imaging
techniques, Intraoperative and postoperative
assessment
Paranasal sinuses
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1/2
1
1
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
Soft tissue calcifications
PRACTICAL - Topics
Radiographic appearance of dental caries, periodontal disease
and Periapical Disease
 Exercises in various techniques for acquiring intra
oral radiographs, - Periapical and bitewing.
 Processing of the exposed films by both manual and
automatic film processing.
 Radiographic interpretation.
Panoramic radiography
 Demonstration of the panoramic machine,
 Patient positioning and the technique.
 Identifying the normal radiographic landmarks.
 Radiographic interpretation.
Extra oral radiographic techniques
 Demonstration of the machine,
 Patient positioning for the various extra oral
radiographic techniques.
 Identifying the normal radiographic landmarks
Advanced imaging modalities
 Demonstrations and practical exercises in Digital
radiography-Periapical and Bitewing Radiography
Temperomandibular joint imaging
 Demonstration of temperomandibular joint
radiography.
II.
Course Component
Lectures
26
III.
Tutorials
1/2
1
2
6
3
9
2
6
1
3
No. of Weeks
5
Practical
13
Contact hours
15
Others
Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/Semester
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Know the Radiographic
Students
interpretation of dental caries,
should take
periodontal and
radiographs for
periapicalpathosis.
the patients
Identify and describe the
under close
radiographical appearance of
supervision.
Method of
Assessment
MCQs and
viva voce
group
discussion.
various dental anomalies.
To learn the basic principles of
panoramic radiography
including the concept of
panoramic imaging, its
applications in oral and
maxillofacial radiology, and
the structure of the
panoramic machine.
Be familiar with the basic
They will be
trained to
interpret the
radiographs
that they have
taken
Presentation of
various
radiographic
images to the
students.
concept of computed
tomography and its main
applications in the field of
oral and maxillofacial
imaging.
Comprehend the basic concepts
of magnetic resonance
imaging ‘MRI' and its use in
oral and maxillofacial region.
Comprehend the theory behind
the use of ultrasounds in the
diagnostic fields including
the physics behind it and its
application in the oral and
maxillofacial region as a non
radiation imaging modality.
Be familiar with the most
commonly used radioactive
isotopes in the field of
nuclear medicine and their
use in diagnosis of certain
conditions.
Radiographic differential
diagnosis of lesions and
diseases affecting the
maxillofacial region will be
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
discussed.
The students should
demonstrate the ability of
professional judgment in
patient selection for
radiographic examination.
They should be able to
differentiate between
radiolucent and radiopaque
lesions.
They should be able to assess
the image quality and apply
differential diagnosis to
abnormal appearances.
Students should be able to
understand the modifications
required in the various
radiographic techniques that
are used for a patient with
shallow palate and bony
prominences.
Work efficiently and effectively
as a team.
Building good spirit.
Radiation safety procedures
should be understood and
followed by all.
Deliver care to patients with
professionalism and self
confidence.
Earn the respect and confidence
of patients through sincere
service and hard work.
Develop Excellent
Communication skills with wide
range of individuals.
Utilize information and
technology as means of
learning, communication, data
collection.
presentations using appropriate
audio visual aids.
Practical and
demonstration
s.
Close
supervision
of the
students
while
performing
radiographic
procedures.
Group
assignment
One to one
student
teacher
direct
interaction.
Group tutorials
for utilization
of appropriate
web based
radiology
material
Assignments.
e. Psychomotor
skills
Illustrate the placement of the X
ray films/Digital sensor,
position-indicating device and
central ray in paralleling and
bisecting the angle technique.
Audio visual
demonstration
of different
radiographic
techniques
I.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
MCQ’s I
40%
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Written Exam
60%
Practical Exams
Oral Exams
Step by step
evaluation
to ensure
that the
student has
mastered
each
procedure
before
proceeding
to next step.
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
30%
20%
10%
D. Students support
Consultations: 2hrs/week
1. Oral Radiology: Principles and Interpretation by Stuart C. White DDS PhD and Michael J.
Pharoah. 2008.
2. Exercises in Oral Radiology and Interpretation by Robert P. Langlais. 2003.
3. Eric Whaites: Essentials of dental Radiography and Radiology, 3rd edition, Elsevier
science 2003.
4. Haring and Jansen Howerton: Dental Radiography: principles and Techniques, 3rd
Edition, saunders, 2006.
5. Master Dentistry: Volume 1: Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Radiology, Pathology and
Oral Medicine by Paul Coulthard, Keith Horner, Philip Sloan, and Elizabeth D. Theaker.
2008.
6. Panoramic Radiology: Seminars on Maxillofacial Imaging and Interpretation by Allan G.
Farman. 2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:

improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.




Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvement
strategies.
Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement
strategies.
Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line with
ANAESTHESIA & EXODONTIA
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Anaesthesia & Exodontia,
315 MDS
2
Dentistry
Ashwin. J.
3rd Year | 6th Semester
252 DMS
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives














Be able to assess patients for minor surgical procedures, properly take physical
examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment.
Thoroughly understand the applied neuro-anatomy of the head and neck region.
Understand the mechanism of pain conduction and the action of local anaesthetic
agents.
Techniques involved in infection control, sterilization, asepsis and disinfection.
Armamentarium
Anatomical considerations for injection techniques
Basic and supplementary injection techniques
Techniques of maxillary anaesthesia
Techniques of mandibular anaesthesia
Complications of LA
Have knowledge about the indications and contraindications for extraction of teeth,
different techniques of teeth removal and the principles of forceps and elevators use.
Know potential complications of exodontia, their aetiology, signs and symptoms,
prevention and their management.
Demonstrate knowledge on the designing of flaps, the methods employed for bone
removal and the different types of suture materials, post-operative instructions and
medications.
Demonstrate knowledge on the different complications encountered during extraction
of teeth or immediately following the extraction.
Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Anaesthesia & Exodontia | Page - 114
This course will be taught as an introduction of oral surgery course in the coming years.
The course is a series of lecture covered in the second semester of the third year. The
course is intended to cover two main topics, local anaesthesia and exodontia. Topics on
local anaesthesia will include how to assess patients on suitability for local anaesthesia.
They will also cover theories of pain, pain control, neuro-anatomy, neuro-physiology,
pharmacokinetics of local anaesthesia, Clinical actions of specific agents,
Armamentarium, Anatomical considerations for injection techniques, Basic and
supplementary injection techniques, Techniques of maxillary anaesthesia, Techniques of
mandibular anaesthesia, Complications of LA, Exodontia, Instrumentations in oral
Surgery, Extraction Techniques and its complications. Theoretical and practical
knowledge of sterilization, control of infection, the different methods for extraction
[intra-alveolar and trans-alveolar], the use of instruments [forceps and elevators],
suture types and materials will be covered. Also, it covers indications and contraindications for teeth extraction, post-operative instructions and follow-up. Lastly, the
course deals with the complications which may occur during or after extraction and
surgery and how to reduce and manage them.
I.
Topics
1-Neurophysiology
2-Pharmacology of LA
3-Clinical actions of specific agents
4-Armanterium
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
1
8- Techniques of mandibular anaesthesia
9-Complications of LA
10-Exdontia
4
1
1
1
11-Instrumentations
4
4
4
1
12-Extraction Techniques
4
1
13-Complications of exodontia
13
Contact hours
4
1
1
1
5-Anatomical considerations
6-Basic and supplementary injection
Techniques
7-Techniques of maxillary anaesthesia
II.
Course Component
Lectures
No. of Weeks
1
4
1
Tutorials
Internship
13
4
Others
III.
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Should know
neurophysiology
associated with LA
Techniques and
Mechanism of
actions of LA
Extraction
techniques
b. Cognitive
Complications of
LA and exodontia
Identify tooth for
extraction
Technique of LA to
be administered
Identify possible
complication
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Should follow
proper protocol for
regular clinical
attendance.
Demonstrate
with staff.
Should develop
good working
relations with his
professional
colleagues.
Should wear a neat
apron/lab coat with
name tag.
Ensure proper
handling of
patients
Demonstration on
patients
Lectures.
Clinical discussions
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
evaluation by staff.
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous
evaluation during
the course
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
knowledge on Oral
surgery by
increased use of
internet/web based
information
Should develop
skills for
administrating LA
and perform
extraction for all
the teeth
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on Oral
Surgery.
Registration of
online journals
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students
Audio-visual/live
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
1. Handbook of Local Anaesthesia- Malamed- 6th edition
2. Local Anaesthesia and Pain Control in Dental Practice- Monheim’s- 8th edition
3. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by Paul D. Robinson PhD BDS MBBS FDS, Thomas R. Pitt
Ford PhD BDS FDS, and Fraser McDonald PhD MSc BDS FDS MOrth. 2000.
4. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by J. A. Baart and H. S. Brand. 2008.
5. Manual of Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by A.P. Chitre. 2006.
6. Local anaesthesia in dentistry: Illustrated handbook on dental local anaesthesia by J
Haglund. 1978.
7. An Introduction to Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Oxford Medical
Publications) by David A. Mitchell. 2006.
8. Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by James R. Hupp, Edward Ellis III, and
Myron R. Tucker. 2008.
9. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Secrets by A. Omar Abubaker DMD PhD and Kenneth J.
Benson. 2007.
10. Clinical Review of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by Shahrokh C. Bagheri DMD MD and
Chris Jo. 2007.
11. Manual of Minor Oral Surgery for the General Dentist by Karl R. Koerner. 2006.
a. Accommodation
 Clinics with 40 dental chairs
 Recovery Room
 Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs
 Scrub Area
 Sterilisation Room
 Changing room with lockers for staff and students
c. Other resources
 Computer systems
 Viva
department:

improvement.


committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRECLINICAL OPERATIVE DENTISTRY II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Dentistry II, 322 RDS
3
Dentistry
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
3rd Year , 6th Semester
321 RDS
-shawajrah
B. Objectives
After completion of the course the students should:








Understand the pathophysiology & histopathology of caries
Design cavities , Manipulate and place light-cured composite restorative resin on
artificial teeth
Know the clinical significance of contacts and contours of the teeth
Design cavities for amalgam restoration on artificial teeth
Correctly use matrices and wedges on artificial teeth
Know the rationale & application of liners and bases to protect the pulp
Perform amalgam restoration to acceptable levels on artificial teeth
Do proper finishing and polishing of amalgam restorations. on artificial teeth
This course is provided by the department of Restorative dental sciences during the
second semester of the third year. The course consists of two parts, theory and
practicals, in which the former includes lectures and seminar presentations and the later
includes the application of the theory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessions
The course is given as one lecture and two lab sessions per week for the whole semester
and will have 3 credit hours and seven contact hours.
In this course the students will be trained in differentiating affected and infected dentin,
design cavities, manipulate and place light-cured composite restorative resin on
artificial teeth, Design cavities, manipulate and place amalgam restorative material on
artificial teeth, create artificial wall for condensation of amalgam in class II cavities with
Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Preclinical Operative Dentistry II | Page - 120
the help of matrices and wedges on artificial teeth, apply liners and bases, finish and
polish amalgam & composite restorations on artificial teeth.
I.
LECTURES
Topics
1
Cariology- II
No. of Credit
hours
2
3
Finishing and polishing of composite restoration
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
Composite cavity preparation & restoration
Contacts & Contours
2
1
1
Pulp Protection
2
Tooth Separation
Finishing & Polishing Of Amalgam Restoration
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
II. PRACTICALS
2
1
Class II Amalgam Cavity Preparation & restoration 1
Class V Amalgam Cavity Preparation & restoration
Contact hours
2
No. Of
Credit
hours
2
Contact
hours
Class II (DO) Amalgam Cavity preparation in mandibular
molars
2
6
2
6
Application of matrix band and retainer followed by base
application
1
3
Class II (M0) Amalgam Cavity preparation in mandibular
molars
Class II (MOD) Amalgam Cavity preparation in mandibular
molars
6
5
Class II (MO) Amalgam restoration in mandibular molars
1
3
7
Class II (MOD) Amalgam Restoration in mandibular molars
1
3
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Class II (DO) Amalgam restoration in mandibular molars
Class II (MO) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillary
molars
1
3
2
6
Class II (DO) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillary
molars
2
6
Class II (MOD) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillary
molars Without involving oblique ridge
2
6
Class II (MOD) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillary
molars involving oblique ridge
2
6
Class II (MO) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molars
Class II (DO) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molars
1
Class II (MOD) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molars
Without involving oblique ridge
1
3
1
3
3
Class II (MOD) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molars
involving oblique ridge
1
3
Class III composite Cavity preparation and restoration in
maxillary incisors
1
3
Class IV composite Cavity preparation and restoration in
maxillary incisors
2
6
Demonstration of complex amalgam restorations
Demonstration of class II cast gold inlay cavity preparation
followed by impression making
1
1
3
Demonstration of class II cast gold onlay cavity preparation
followed by impression making
1
3
III.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14 credit hrs
---
Practical
28 credit hrs
3
Others
---
IV.
V.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Recognize the various
Explanation
methods of Patient
utilising
education and
Microsoft power
motivation in the
point
prevention and
Illustration by
treatment of dental
drawing pictures
caries
Rapid
questionnaires
Judiciously use liners
immediately
and bases to protect the
following the
pulp
explanations
Asking one of
Recognize the various
the students to
indications, advantages,
explain the
techniques, and
concepts taught
limitations of amalgam
to develop self
restorations.
interest and
competition
among the
fellow students
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments
which includes
Quizzes, mcq’s &
Midterm
examination(T/P)
And Final
examination(T/P)
Students will develop
good concentration on
the topics which will
result in good
concentration,perception
and nevertheless
memory all of which
leading to understanding
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts both
theoretical and practical
at any given time.
Explanation
utilising
Microsoft power
point
Explanatory
drawing to
clarify some
parts
guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Continuous
assessments
which includes
Quizzes, mcq’s &
Midterm
examination(T/P)
And Final
examination(T/P)
The students are
encouraged to have an
attitude for commitment
The students are
always
encouraged to
Assignments on
theoretical
aspects that is
Practical
demonstrations
of what have
been taught
theoretically
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
to succeed in the field,
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with the
staff members, with
responsibility towards
finishing all assignments
on time.
the best in
friendly way,
and assignments
are given
deadlines to be
submitted.
practical
requirement are
set at a definite
number
delivered at a
required time
Know the basics of
communication and
information technology,
utilise these skills the
best way possible in
their assignment
The students are
guided to carry
out web based
search and
encouraged to
collect material
of relevance
pertaining to
operative
dentistry and
actively involve
in circulating the
electronically
collected
material with
the fellow
colleagues and
staff members.
Evaluate their
method of
collection of ebased facts ,
assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the
same.
Use the instruments
required to perform
cavity preparation
Able to handle engine
driven rotary
instrumentation in a
proper and safe way
Properly use of
amalgam material
Live
demonstrations
Critical
evaluation of the
work done in
constructive
manner
Adjuncts in the
form of lectures
or illustrative
diagrams,
Assessment by
the staff members
on their
behaviour and
attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment
The students will
have continuous
assessment on
the practical
work and the
students are
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
Lab sessions on
artificial teeth.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Mid term practical
exam
60%
Final Written Exams
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
30%
30%
D. Students support
b- Dr Abbas Rizvi
1. Fundamentals of Operative Dentistry: A Contemporary Approach by James B. Summitt, J.
William Robbins, Thomas J. Hilton, and Richard S. Schwartz. 2006.
J. Swift. 2006.
5. Pickard's Manual of Operative Dentistry (Oxford Medical Publications) by Edwina A. M.
Kidd, Bernard G. N. Smith, and Timothy F. Watson. 2003.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:



improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
EPIDEMIOLOGY & BIOSTATISTICS
1. Institution
2. College
b. Credit hours
d. Name(s) of faculty member(s) responsible for the
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Year/Semester at which the course is offered
Jazan University
Epidemiology & Biostatistics,
332 PDS
1
Dentistry
Dr Kaushik Sengupta
Dr Aadil Inamdar
Dr Santosh Tadakamandla
3rd Year/6th Semester
331 PDS
–
Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives












Explain the relevance and application of statistics in biomedical research
Develop graphical and/or tabular displays of statistical data
Identify the different descriptive and exploratory data analysis techniques
Demonstrate knowledge of hypothesis testing and estimation
Explain the difference between statistical and clinical significance
Discuss the basic principles of epidemiology used for investigating health and disease in
populations
Interpret relevant population health measures, including clinical and patient-based
measures of oral health
Describe the epidemiology of oral diseases such as dental caries, periodontal disease, and
oral cancer
Locate credible Internet sources for information on the epidemiology, diagnosis,
prevention, and treatment of different oral conditions
Explain the benefits of screening and early disease detection
Enumerate the salient properties of a diagnostic test
Describe the different design strategies used in clinical epidemiologic research, including
descriptive studies, interventional and observational analytic studies, and meta-analysis
and systematic reviews
Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Epidemiology & Biostatistics | Page - 128
As part of the lecture series in community dentistry, this course introduces students to the
basic principles and methods of biostatistics and epidemiology. The first part of the course
deals with core applied statistical concepts and methods. It introduces students to the
fundamental paradigms underlying statistical methodology; the display and communication
of statistical data; the basics of frequentist methods such as hypothesis testing and
confidence intervals; and analysis and interpretation for single group summaries, such as
means, medians, variances, and rates. The second part of the course introduces the students
to the key methods utilized in classical and clinical epidemiology, including risk estimation
and causal inferences, and the various design strategies used in clinical epidemiologic
research, for instance, case-control and cohort studies, ecological studies and populationbased surveys, randomized controlled trials, and meta-analysis techniques used in the
development of clinical practice guidelines. It covers the broad determinants of health;
measures of disease frequency and association; epidemiology of oral diseases (e.g., dental
caries, periodontal diseases, oral cancer); screening of oral conditions; properties of
diagnostic tests, including sensitivity, specificity, likelihood ratios, predictive values, and
receiver operator characteristic curves; and measurement of patient-reported outcomes.
The course consists of didactic lectures, case presentations, and discussion sessions.
I.
Topics to be Covered
Topics
Principles of biostatistics
 General overview of biostatistics
 Descriptive and inferential statistics
 Types of data
 Graphical data displays and data transformations
 Univariate analysis
– Frequencies and distribution
– Measures of central tendency
– Measures of dispersion
 Elements of statistical inference
– Samples and populations
– Null and alternate hypotheses
– Types I and II errors; power and sample size
– Hypothesis testing (P values) and estimation
(confidence intervals)
 Statistical vs. clinical significance
Principles of epidemiology
 Epidemiology past and present
 Assessing causality
– Risk; risk factors, markers, and determinants
– Evaluation of the presence of association: roles of
No. of Weeks
4
Contact
Hours
4
4
4
chance, bias, and confounding
– Validity, reliability, and generalizability
– Strength of association
 Measures of disease frequency and association
– Ratio, proportion, percentage, and rate
– Prevalence (point, period) and incidence
(cumulative incidence, incidence density)
– Morbidity and mortality rates
– Relative risk and odds ratio
– Attributable risk
 Screening and diagnostic tests
 Assessing the effectiveness of disease and injury
prevention
– Efficacy, effectiveness, safety
– Prevented fraction, number needed to treat,
number needed to harm
Epidemiology of oral diseases
 Measures of oral health
– Clinical indicators
– Patient-based measures (quality of life)
 Epidemiology of dental caries
 Epidemiology of periodontal diseases
 Epidemiology of oral cancer
 Epidemiology of other dental conditions
Design strategies in epidemiologic research
 Descriptive studies
– Correlational studies
– Case report and case series
– Surveys (cross-sectional, repeated cross-sectional)
 Analytic studies
– Observational studies
o Case-control studies
o Cohort studies
– Interventional studies
o Clinical trials
 Research synthesis: systematic reviews and metaanalyses
II.
Course Component
Lectures
14
Tutorials
–
3
3
3
3
–
Others
–
III. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semester
IV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Different Domains of Learning
Teaching
Method of
Skills
Description
Strategies
Assessment
a. Knowledge
 Comprehensive
 Provision of
 Examinations
understanding and
extensive
 Continuous takeknowledge of
learning notes
home assignments
biostatistics and
and materials to
 Research projects
epidemiology
students
 Quizzes
 Comprehensive
 Seminars
understanding of the
 Guided reading
integration of the
principles of
biostatistics and
epidemiology with other
specialties
 Understanding of areas
of current research and
development
b. Cognitive
 Class projects
 Monthly
concepts, principles, and
from students
assignment report
theories of biostatistics
 Seminars from
 Project report
and epidemiology in
students
different areas of
 Written
report
biomedical research
assignments
from students
c. Interpersonal
 Taking responsibilities
 Student teaching  Group projects
Skills &
materials
 Communicating
 Continuous
Responsibilities
effectively with patients  Problem-based
assessment
and colleagues
learning
 Written
exercises
 Continuous professional
examinations
 Group
development
 Evaluation of
discussions
seminar
 Seminar
presentation
presentations
d. Communication,  Practical
 Student-led
 Continuous
Information
implementation of
teaching
assessment
Technology, and
biostatistics and
materials
 Assessment of
Numerical Skills
epidemiology
 Use of software
software
 Identification of
such as SSPS and
proficiency
appropriate statistical
EndNote
 Written
techniques for solving
 Use of power
examinations
problems in oral health
point and other
research
presentation
 Appropriate computer
platforms and
e. Psychomotor
skills
skills for undertaking
statistical calculations
 Effective
communication (both
written and oral)
technology in academics
and research
–
methods
 Use of
information and
communication
technology
–
Schedule of Assessment Task for Students During the Semester
Assessment
Proportion
Task
30%
Quiz I
Quiz II
Midterm Written Exam
70%
Research Project
Oral Exam (Viva Voce)
Final Written Exam
–
V.
Proportion
10%
10%
10%
15%
15%
40%
D. Student support
Faculty members are available for individual student consultations and academic advice
1. Fundamentals of Biostatistics (seventh edition) by Bernard Rosner. Harvard University,
Duxbury Press, 2010.
2. Biostatistics: The Bare Essentials (third edition) by Geoffrey R. Norman and David L.
Streiner. BC Decker Inc., 2008.
3. PDQ Statistics (third edition) by Geoffrey R. Norman and David L. Streiner. BC Decker
Inc., 2003.
4. Biostatistics, Student Solutions Manual: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences
(Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics) (ninth edition) by Wayne W. Daniel. Wiley,
2009.
5. Epidemiology in Medicine by Charles H. Hennekens and Julie E. Buring. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 1987.
6. Introduction to Epidemiology (fifth edition) by Ray M. Merrill. Jones & Bartlett
Publishers, 2009.
7. Essentials of Epidemiology in Public Health (second edition) by Ann Aschengrau and
George R. Seage. Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2007.
8. Clinical Epidemiology: How to Do Clinical Practice Research (third edition) by R. Brian
Haynes, David L. Sackett, Gordon H. Guyatt, and Peter Tugwell. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2005.
9. Clinical Epidemiology: The Essentials (fourth edition) by Robert H. Fletcher and Suzanne
W. Fletcher. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.
10. PDQ Epidemiology (third edition) by David L. Streiner and Geoffrey R. Norman. People's
Medical Publishing House, 2009.
11. Prevention of Oral Disease (fourth edition) by John J. Murray, June H. Nunn, and James G.
Steele. Oxford University Press, 2003.
a. Accommodation
 Computers with CD/DVD ROM facility
 Software: Microsoft Office, SPSS, and Endnote
c. Other resources
department
assessments
teaching
Committee
Review
Planning
requirements
7 T H SEMESTER
FOURTH YEAR
CODE
411 MDS
412 MDS
421 RDS
423 RDS
431 PDS
441 SDS
443 SDS
451 DMS
452 DMS
TOTAL
SEVENTH SEMESTER
COURSE TITLE
TH
PR
Oral Pathology II
1
3
Oral Medicine & Diagnostic
2
3
Sciences I
Operative Dentistry I
1
3
Preclinical Endodontics I
1
3
Periodontics I
1
3
Clinical Removable
1
3
Prosthodontics I
Preclinical Fixed
1
6
Prosthodontics I
General Medicine
2
0
General Surgery & Ear
1
0
Nose Throat
9
11
24
CRH
2
3
2
2
2
2
3
2
COH
4
P-REQ
312 MDS
4
4
4
322 RDS
322 RDS
312 MDS
5
4
7
1
2
19
35
1
314 MDS
342 SDS
322 RDS
352 DMS
352 DMS
Institution
College
I.
ORAL PATHOLOGY II
Jazan University
Course identification and general information
Course Title
Oral Pathology II
Code
411 MDS
Credit Hours
2
Year/Semester at which the course is
offered
Pre-Requisites for the course
4th year/7th Semester
Oral Pathology I - 312 MDS
Program in which the course is offered Dentistry
Name of faculty member
responsible for the course
II.
Al Shawajrah campus
Objectives




III.
Dr. Ali Idris
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology is the dental speciality and discipline of pathology that
deals with the nature, identification and management of wide variety of diseases
affecting the Oral and Maxillofacial regions. The diagnosis and treatment of these
diseases comprise an essential part of the practice of dentistry.
The objective of this course is to provide the comprehensive information needed to
identify and manage oral diseases/conditions in the clinical practice in which the
students will be involved after graduation.
The course provides a complete understanding of the pathologic causes, pathogenesis,
processes, effects and prognosis of these diseases.
The course enhances diagnostic skills through the use of clinical, radiographic,
microscopic, biochemical or other examinations and the development of differential
diagnosis for similar diseases.
Course description
This course is offered during the 6th semester of the third year and the 7th semester of the
fourth year and has four credit hours. The course combines lecture presentations with practical,
including microscopic laboratory sessions and clinicopathologic conferences (CPC) arranged in
such way that the practical and the CPC sessions are correlated with the subject topics covered
in the didactic lectures. Students involved in this course are expected to integrate and correlate
knowledge concerning clinical, radiographical and microscopic features; utilising them in
obtaining the diagnosis of oral and maxillofacial diseases.
Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Oral Pathology II | Page - 136
I.
Topics to be covered in Oral Pathology II
Topics
Odontogenic tumors
 Epithelial tumors:
 Mesenchymal tumors:
 Mixed (epithelial and mesenchymal ) tumors
Epithelial pathology
Mesenchymal reactive lesions and soft tissue tumors
 Benign tumors
 Malignant tumors
Salivary gland diseases
 Developmental anomalies
 Variation in the amount of salivary flow
 Obstructive
 Sialadenitis
 Autoimmune conditions
 Necrotizing sialometaplasia
 Sialadenosis (Sialosis)
Salivary gland tumors
 Salivary gland adenomas
 Carcinomas
Bone pathology
Dermatologic diseases
 Immune-related diseases
 Other diseases
Forensic Dentistry
Revision
II.
Number of
weeks
1st , 2nd w
Contact
hours
4
3rd , 4th w
4
7th, 8th w
4
9th,10th w
4
11th , 12th w
4
14th w
1
1
5th, 6th w
13th w
4
2
Course Component
Lectures
14
Tutorials
Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others
100 minutes for microscopic lab
per week
III.
IV.
a. Knowledge
20 minutes will
be used for CPC
&/or assignment
presentation.
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
a) To know the common clinical and microscopic features of oral lesions.
b) To know the current concepts of oral and maxillofacial pathology.
c) To understand the contemporary theories on disease etiology, pathogenesis, processes,
prognosis and current therapeutic regimens.
a) Data show lectures are given.
b) Written assignment will be requested from students.
c) Referral to different textbooks for specific items for private study/learning hours.
(iii)
Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
a) Assignment evaluation, discussion and scoring
b) Short quizzes
c) Written examinations including Short Answers, Essay, Definitions,
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
a) This course forms a bridge between the didactic histopathological aspects of oral
pathology and the practical clinical radiographic and analytical considerations.
b) The student should develop the ability to correlate clinical and radiographic features to
the concomitant histopathological changes and analyse data in a comprehensive way.
c) Students should acquire the capability for differentiating similar oral diseases.
d) Students should be able to interpret the microscopic features and to make
histopathological diagnosis.
a) Clinico-pathologic conference (CPC) including case histories, clinical and microscopic
slides using data show is given.
b) Students interpret, compare, contrast, discuss and correlate clinical and radiographic
data to the histopathologic features, differentiate and delineate similar lesions and
reach final diagnosis.
c) Students will be exposed during the practical sessions to the histopathological changes
associated with almost all the oral lesions
a) Continuous laboratory assessment
b) CPC- discussion, and evaluation
c) Written examination will include multiple choice questions.
d) Practical examination will include spot diagnosis for histopathological features using
glass slides in addition to case histories, using clinical and microscopic slides presented
by data show
a) Students are divided into groups; each group is requested to make power point
presentation about selected topic related to the didactic ones.
b) Student works with others and interacts with team.
d) Each group will be responsible to present and discuss the selected topic.
a) Students will be guided, supervised by an advisor staff member
b) Students should make comprehensive presentation for the topic.
b) Staff members will discuss and evaluate the presentation for each group
d. Numerical and Communication Skills
a) Use of web based material related to oral pathology to appraise the
date concept of oral diseases
advanced or up to
b) Students will be requested to find out the prevalence of the lesion in their written
assignment (hospital-based)
(i) Description of the numerical and communication skills to be developed

Communicate with responsible people, and search to find out the prevalence of the
lesion of interest in their written assignment
a) Recommend students to contact person in charge in University hospital, and/or Ministry
of health central pathology lab
b) Revise the national cancer registry for any useful information
a) Evaluate their assignment by staff members
e. Psychomotor Skills
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance required
a) Familiarize students with microscope adjustments
a)
Instructions and continuous supervision during student usage of microscope
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
a) Microscopic laboratory exam
V.
Scheduling of Assessment Tasks for Students during the semester
Assessment Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,
examination etc.)
40%
1
Written assignment & presentation
2
Quizzes
3
Mid term
4
Attendance and
Evaluation of the practical note
1
Final practical Examination
Spot diagnosis of glass slides
CPC Examination
2
Final written Examination
Total
Week due
10%
1-15
5%
7
60%
100%
15
15
Learning resources
 Essential Text Book and Atlas
- Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology
Neville BW, Damn DD, Allen CM & Bouquot JE
Latest Edition
WB Saunders Co.
-
-
5%
3, 5,9 and 11
IV.
Students support
Consultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/week
V.
Proportion
Oral Pathology – Clinical Pathologic Correlation
Regezi JA, Sciubba JJ & Jordan RCK
Latest Edition
WB Saunders Co.
-
Cowson’s Essentials of Oral Pathology and Oral Medicine
Cawson RA and Odell EW
Latest edition,
Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier,
London, New York, Oxford, Philadelphia.

Recommended Text Book and Atlas
Color Atlas of Oral Diseases, Clinical and Pathologic Correlations
Cawson, Bennie, Barrett & Wright
Latest Edition
20%
10%
10%
40%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VI.
Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology: A rational for diagnosis and treatment
Robert E Marx, Diane Stern
Latest Edition
Quintnessence Publishing Co.
Contemporary Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology
Sapp JP, Eversole LR, Wysock GP
Latest Edition
Mosby Co. St Louis
Oral Pathology
Soames JV and Southam JC
Latest Edition
Oxford
Text book of Oral Pathology
Shafer
Latest Edition
WB Saunders Co.
Color Atlas of clinical Oral Pathology
Neville, Damm, White, Waldron
Latest Edition
William and Wilkins, Baltimore.
A Color Atlas of Orofacial Diseases
W.R.Tyldesley
Latest Edition
Wolfe
A color Atlas of Oral Pathology
Lee
Latest edition
Wolfe
Color Atlas of Common Oral Diseases
Robert P. Langlais, Craig S Miller, Jill S Nield-Gehrig, 2009.
Facilities required
1. Accommodation
 Lecture rooms with a seating capacity for 40-60 students 2 hours/week for
lectures.
 Labs with 40-60 light binocular microscopes (each one has 4 augmentation x4,
x10, x20, and x40) 2 hours/week for practical scissions.
 A laptop with a projector for power point presentations
 Computers with online access to data bases ( internet and related scientific
publications)
 Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals.
4. Other resources
 Oral Histopathology adequately equipped laboratory
VII.
Course evaluation and improvement processes
1. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:
 Confidential student’s personal written feedbacks
2. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the department:




Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodic examinations
and assessments exercises.
Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating the
Peer evaluations.
3. Processes for improvement of teaching:




By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on its improvement.
Regular feedback to staff members
4. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:







Random sampling and checking exam papers by examination committee
Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports
Periodic exchange for advisory staff member
Remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another
institution
Quizzes conducted as a part of continuous assessment
Small group student’s presentation and discussion in the lab under faculty
supervision
Evaluation of collective students’ performance, tutors and examination reports
as a whole
5. Arrangements for periodical review and effective planning for the course improvement:


Review:
Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching fields.
Reviewing feedbacks from colleagues and students for planning and
improvement of transferable skills.







Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge from
faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.
Comparing student’s performance benchmark with other similar institutes
teaching similar course and working on its improvement.
Planning:
Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and requirements.
Periodic feedback from colleagues and students for planning improvement
strategies.
Provide additional training for staff as where and when required.
Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies
ORAL MEDICINE & DIAGNOSTIC SCIENCES I
Institution
College
Jazan University
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Sciences I, 412 MDS.
2
Dentistry
Prof. Ebtessam Elzefzaf
Dr. Reda Sabra
Dr.Sameena Parveen
Dr. Tenny John
4th Year | 7th Semester
314 MDS
-- Shawajra campus
B- Objectives
By the end of the course the students should be able to:








Properly communicate with the patient, establish appropriate patient dentist
relationship.
Obtain and record comprehensive history (dental and medical).
Perform an appropriate physical examination including lymph nodes, extra and intra
oral examinations
Interpret the findings and recognize proper further investigations.
Pending their referral to the appropriate department.
Formulate and rationalized preliminary treatment plane for their patient
Establish diagnosis and management for common oral diseases, including the
immunologic diseases, red and white lesions, vesicular and bullous lesions and
Pigmented lesions of oral mucosa.
Differentiate between different oral diseases and conditions based on clinical and
laboratory findings
C- Course description
The course is intended for the dental student to gain basic knowledge and skills that are
involved in the diagnostic process and treatment planning. The course will allow students to
effectively communicate with patients and establish sound patient dentist relationships,
carrying out a general and detailed examination of the extra-oral and intra-oral structures. The
course is offered through lectures, clinical practice and tutorials . Lectures will cover various
topics on the interviewing process, clinical methods and on relevant aspects of the diagnostic
tools employed in treatment planning, each lecture will be followed by practical section where
the students will be exposed to clinics, and closely monitored, in addition to tutorials for
Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Oral Medicine & Diagnostic Sciences I | Page - 144
discussion and allow students for asking. The course is taken over one semester and shall have
two credit hours.
I.
Topic
No of weeks
Introduction to oral
medicine and oral diagnosis
Clinical examination
Dental charting, referral
and consultations
procedures.
Treatment plan
Laboratory aids for
diagnosis
Immunologic diseases
(I.Ds.).
Red and white lesions of
oral mucosa
ulcerative, vesicular and
bullous lesions
Pigmented lesions of oral
mucosa
Total
II.
Date
1st
week
2nd
week
Practical hours
1
3
6
1
3
6
1
1
1
2
3
3
1
14
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
Two hours/week
One hour/week
∙ Theoretical
illustration of
infection control in
dental clinic
∙Discuss the
importance of
infection control in
dental clinic and
the significance of
cross infections.
∙ Introduction to
oral medicine and
oral diagnosis, ∙
Infection control in
dental clinic.
∙ Patient history
∙ Examination
techniques
Extra oral
examination
Intra oral
examination
Contact hours
∙ Establishing the
diagnosis
∙ Medical referral
and
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
42
Internship
Three hours/week
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
84
Others
-
∙ students practice the
infection control
procedures
∙Oral
and
Maxillofacial
Medicine: The
Basis
of
Diagnosis and
Treatment by
Crispian Scully.
2008.
Student will trained
practically dental
charting including :
Personal data
Oral
and
Maxillofacial
Medicine: The
Basis
of
Lymph node
examination
3rd
week
4th
week
5th
week
Laboratory aids
for diagnosis, blood
chemistry
oral biopsy
procedures.
∙ Immunologic
diseases:
- General principles
of immunologic
diseases
-Immunodeficiency
-Primary
immunologic
diseases
(phagocyte
deficiencies,
deficiencies in
adaptive immunity,
T-cell and B-cell
deficiencies)
∙ Immunologic
diseases:
-Secondary
immunologic
diseases(innate
immune system).
-Allergy and
hypersensitivity
reactions(
hypersensitivity
reactions, latex
allergy, oral allergy
syndrome, serum
Consultation
procedures
∙Dental /medical
records:
organization,
confidentiality and
informed consent
Formulating a
plane of treatment
and assessing
medical risks
∙ Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
Immunodeficiency
and
Primary
immunologic
diseases.
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
Secondary
immunologic
diseases Allergy a
and
hypersensitivity
Vital signs(pulse and
blood pressure)
Dental history
Medical history
Diagnosis and
Treatment by
Crispian Scully.
2008.
Dental charting:
Extra oral examination
Intra oral examination
(teeth and soft tissues)
Oral
and
Maxillofacial
Medicine: The
Basis
of
Diagnosis and
Treatment by
Crispian Scully.
2008.
Examination of patients
with oral diseases
with oral diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship.
2008.
Ch.18.page435.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship.
2008.
Ch.18.page435.
sickness)
6th
week
7th
week
8th
week
Immunologic
diseases:
-Auto immune
diseases
(systemic lupus
erythematosus,
scleroderma,
Idiopathic
inflammatory
myopathies,
rheumatoid
arthritis, mixed
connective tissue
diseases)
D.D and treatment
plane of
immunologic
diseases
Red and white
lesions of oral
mucosa
-Red and white
tissue reactions
-Infectious
diseases(oral
candidiasis , hairy
leukoplakia)
-Premalignant
lesions(oral hairy
leukoplakia, and
erythroplakia oral
sub –
mucous fibrosis)
Red and white
lesions of oral
mucosa
-Immunopatholgic
diseases:
(Oral lichen planus,
Drug induced
lichenoid reactions
of graft versus host
diseases
Lupus
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding -Auto
immune diseases
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
candidiasis ,oral
hairy leukoplakia,
and erythroplakia
oral sub –mucous
fibrosis)
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding Oral
lichen planus,
Drug induced
lichenoid reactions
of graft versus host
diseases
Lupus
erythematosis
Identification of oral
ulcers in patients with
auto immune diseases,
skin manifestations
and clinical
differentiation between
diseases.
with oral diseases
Clinical Examination of
patients with oral
lichen planus
Skin manifestations in
immunopathologic
diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship.
2008.
Ch.18.page435.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. Ch
4 page 77 .
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. Ch
4 page 77 .
9th
week
10th
week
11th
erythematosis
reaction to
mechanical truma
toxic reactions
Red and white
lesions of oral
mucosa
-Allergic
reactions(licheniod
contact reactions,
reactions to
dentifrices and
chlorhexidin)
-Other red and
white lesions
lesions(benign
migratory glossitis
leukodema white
sponge nevus hair
tongue)
∙D.D of red and
white lesion
Ulcerative,
vesicular and
bullous lesions
-Acute multiple
lesions (herpes
simplex virus
infection, varecella
zoster, virus
infection, coxsackie
virus infections
necrotizing
ulcerative gingivitis
and periodontitis
erythema
multiform, stevens
johnson syndrome
and toxic
epidermal
necrolysis)
-Oral
hypersensitivity
reaction
∙ ulcerative,
reaction to
mechanical truma
-toxic reactions
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
licheniod contact
reactions,
reactions to
dentifrices and
chlorhexidin)
(benign migratory
glossitis
leukodema white
sponge nevus hair
tongue
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding Acute
multiple ulcers,
vesicles and
bullous lesions
Illustrate colour
Clinical examination of
patients with oral
diseases
role of medical and
dental history in
diagnosis
Clinical examination of
patients with oral
ulcers differentiation
between oral ulcer and
associated skin
manifestations ,
laboratory aids of
diagnosis for these
diseases
Student will take
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. Ch
4 page 77 .
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. ch 3
page 41
Burket's
Oral
week
12th
week
13th
week
vesicular and
bullous lesions
-Chronic multiple
lesions(pemphigus
valgaris,
paraneoplastic
pemphigus,
pemphigus
vegitans, subepithelial bullous
dermatosis, bulolus
pemphigoid,
mucous membrane
pemphegoid linear
Ig A diseases,
epidermolysis
bullosa, and
chronic bullous
disease of child
hood)
Ulcerative,
vesicular and
bullous lesions
-Recurring oral
ulcers (recurrent
aphthus stomatitis,
Behcet´s disease)
-Single
ulcers(traumatic
injuries, esinophilic
ulcers of the
tongue.,
histoplasmosis
blastomoycosis,
and phycomycosis)
D.D of oral ulcers
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding Chronic
multiple vesicular
and bullous lesions
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
Recurring oral
ulcers-Single
ulcers
colour atlas of oral
Pigmented lesions
medicine cases
of oral
regarding
mucosa(endogenou
endogenous
s pigmentation ,
pigmentation ,
focal melanotic
focal melanotic
pigmentation
pigmentation
charting for patients
with oral and skin
ulcers ,record medical
history and examine
ulcers
with oral diseases
Clinical charting of
patients with oral
pigmented lesions
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. ch 3
page 41
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. ch 3
page 41
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. Ch
14th
week
III.
Pigmented lesions
of oral mucosa
multifocal
melanotic
pigmentations ,
melanosis
associated with
systemic or genetic
diseases,)
colour atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
multifocal
melanotic
pigmentations ,
melanosis
associated with
systemic or genetic
diseases,)
Assessment Schedule and weighting
Proportion
40%
Final term exam
60%
5 page 107
Examination and
recording the medical
history, clinical
manifestations and
treatment plan of
patients with oral
diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A.
Ship. 2008. Ch
5 page 107
Task
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Mid term
Written
practical
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
30%
20%
Oral exams
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate
on
theoretical
several
of
knowledge related
important
points
to Oral medicine
with
and
diagnostic associated
assigned readings.
science into clinical
The purposes of the
practice.
lectures are to
increase
the
understanding and
to complement the
assigned readings.
The lectures are not
a replacement of
the
assigned
readings and other
resources.
10%
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions
(MCQ)
based on materials
from the lectures
and
assigned
readings from the
text book.
2-Short
answer
type questions
3-True/False type
questions
4-Patient’s clinical
examination
and
treatment planning
5-oral exam
b. Cognitive
1-Demonstrate
ability to use self
knowledge
and
decision
on
working
with
colleagues, patients,
and teacher.
2-Develop a dentistpatient relationship
with patients.
3-Demonstrate
knowledgeable skill
performance
in
carrying out oral
medicine
and
diagnostic
procedures
1-Lectures,
oral
medicine
and
diagnostic science
exam on patients ,
treatment planning
on partner,
Small
group
activity
rotation
(Prophylaxisstudent pair switch,
Communication
with Patients )
2-Seminars
to
insure
the
appropriate
application
of
different
clinical
concepts.
3-Case study to
develop rationales
for oral medicine
and
diagnostic
science
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment
planning.
c. Interpersonal
& 1-Develop
Responsibilities
awareness
into
one’s own attitude
towards oral and
periodontal
diseases
2-Value one’s own
mental
health
practices
as
a
professional
general
dental
practitioner.
1-Video taping of
actual
students
interactions
in
groups or one-toone student patient
interaction (or role
plays) to teach
dynamics
of
interaction.
2Direct
interaction
with
patients (real-life
simulation)
to
apply and critique
interpersonal skills.
d. Communication
Student’s cognitive
skill
will
be
evaluated on the
basis
of
participation,
professionalism and
attendance.
1-Atlas for oral
diseases interview
(to demonstrate the
ability
of
communication
with patients)
2- Seminar (to
present
project
outcome
as
a
demonstration
of
ability to apply
interviewing
and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication
skills
between
students
and
patients.
Use of web based Group tutorial to Assignments
(to
Information
material related to facilitate selection
Technology
& oral medicine and & utilization of
Numerical skills
diagnostic science . appropriate
web
based
oral
medicine
and
diagnostic science
subjects.
present
recent
different
topic
related
to
oral
medicine therapy.
-Learning resources
Essential textbooks:
1. Burket's Oral Medicine 11/e by Greenberg, Martin Greenberg, Michael Glick, and
Jonathan A. Ship. 2008.
2. Oral and Maxillofacial Medicine: The Basis of Diagnosis and Treatment by Crispian
Scully. 2008.
3. A guide to common oral lesions Dr. Charles. Dunlap and Dr. Bruce. F, Barker Department
of Oral Maxillofacial pathology. UMCK School of dentistry.
Recommended books:
1- Pockets Atlas of Oral Diseases, 2nd ed. edition Laskaris G. Thieme Inc., 2006.
2- Oral Medicine Secrets by Stephen T. Sonis, Leslie Shu-Tung Fang, and Robert C. Fazio.
2002.
3- Oral Diagnosis, Oral Medicine and treatment planing by Bricker S., Langlais R & Miller C.
Lea & Febiger 1994.
3. Tyldesley's Oral Medicine, Anne; Longman, Lesley 5th Edition Copyright Â©2003
Oxford University Press > Front of Book >.
Periodical, web sites, etc:
1- Oral Diseaseshttp://www.blackwell-syngergy.com/loi/jop
2- Journals of oral pathology & medicine http//www.blackwell- syngergy.com/loi/jop
3- Oral diagnosis: The Clinician Guide by birnbaum W & Dunne S. ButterworthHeinemam:1st edition.
Other facilities:
a-Accommodation
b- Computing resources
c-Other resources
department:
 By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on its
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.


Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge
Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similar
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
OPERATIVE DENTISTRY I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Operative Dentistry I, 421
RDS
2
Dentistry
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
322 RDS
shawajrah
B. Objectives








Understand and apply the sound principles of infection control in keeping with current
regulation
Know the routine chair side pre-operative procedures
Know how to asses , examine and plan the treatment for the patient
Be able to achieve moisture control, without harming the patient
Know the various diagnostic tests, methods of prevention & management of caries
Be able to control the pain while doing operative procedures
Know the applied aspects of composite resin material
Be able to prepare & restore simple class I cavities with amalgam restorative material
on patients
This course is provided by the Restorative department during the first semester of the
fourth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and cinical training, in which the
former includes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes working on the
patients in the clinics
The course is given as one lecture and one lab session per week for the whole semester and
will have 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.
In this course the students will be trained to control the infection in the dental operatory,
perform the routine chair side pre-operative procedures, diagnose the disease and plan the
Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Operative Dentistry I | Page - 155
treatment for the patient, control the pain and moisture while treating the patient, prepare
& restore simple class I cavities with amalgam restorative material on patients.
I.
LECTURES
Topics
No. of
Weeks
Contact
hours
1
Infection control
1
1
3
Patient Assessment, Examination, Diagnosis & Treatment
Planning
4
4
2
Sterilization
8
10
12
13
SI
NUM
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
Isolation of the Operating Field
2
2
Pain Control
1
1
Caries diagnosis, prevention & control
2
Clinical aspects of Composite Resin material
2
2
2
CLINICS
Orientation to the dental clinic, dental unit, its accessories, and high speed rotary
instruments.
Introduction to Operative clinic system, patient – dentist relationship , patient records
and filing system
Patient preparation , position, assessment and diagnosis
Rubber dam application
Simple Amalgam restorations
Conventional Glass ionomer restorations
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14
--III.
2
Practicals
14
Others
---
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Should be well
Explanation
versed with all the
utilising Microsoft
concepts of
power point
sterilization and
including pictures
disinfection in
Explanations by
Operative dentistry drawing pictures
Interactions with
Students should be
the students to
able to obtain a
explain the
detailed case
concepts taught to
history of the
develop self
patient, diagnose
interest and
the disease and
competition among
plan the treatment
the fellow students
accordingly
Complete
Should be able to
supervision and
carry out isolation
instruction on each
of the operatory
clinical case
field.
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments which
includes
Quizzes, mcq’s &
Midterm
examination(T/P)
And Final
examination(T/P)
Realize and
consider the pain ,
its causes,
mechanism and its
control techniques
Describe and apply
different operator
and chair positions
The clinical
treatment of
cavitated, carious
teeth must be
accomplished
expeditiously,
judiciously and
appropriately.
b. Cognitive
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
Continuous
assessments which
includes
Quizzes, mcq’s &
Midterm
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
concentration,
perception and
nevertheless
memory all of
which leading to
understanding,
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts
(both theoretical
and practical) at
any given time.
The students are
encouraged to have
an attitude for
commitment to
succeed in the field,
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff members/
patients , with
responsibility
towards finishing
all cases on time.
some parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
examination(T/P)
And Final
examination(T/P)
The student are
always encouraged
to the best in
friendly way, and
cases are given and
completed
accordingly. Clinical
requirement are set
at a definite
number
Assessment of
clinical cases and
their completion
and follow up at a
given period of time
Clinical
demonstrations ,
case presentation
and supervision
Assignments on
theoretical aspects
that is delivered at a
required time
Assesment by the
staff members on
their behaviour /
rapport with the
patients and
attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment
/Clinical cases
required
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Develop the ability
to do a case
presentation to the
class utilising
Microsoft
PowerPoint
Know the basics of
communication and
information
technology & utilise
The students are
guided to carry out
web based search
and encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative dentistry
and actively involve
in circulating the
Evaluate their
method of
collection of ebased facts &
assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the same.
these skills the best
way possible in
their assignments
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
colleagues and staff
members.
Use the instruments
required to perform
cavity preparation
Clinical
demonstrations
Ability to utilise
electronic library/
e-journals.
Able to handle
engine driven
rotary
instrumentation in
a proper and safe
way in the patients
mouth
Critical evaluation
on the clinical work
done in a
constructive
manner.
The students will
have continuous
assessment on the
practical work and
the students are
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
Properly use of
amalgam material
Able to provide the
treatment details to
patient /build up
good dentistpatient relationship
and provide the
treatment in a best
possible way
keeping the
psychological status
of patients in mind.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Mid term practical
exam
60%
Final Written Exams
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
30%
30%
D. Students support
b- Dr Abbas Rizvi
J. Swift. 2006.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.


committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRECLINICAL ENDODONTICS I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
423 RDS
2
Dentistry
Prof. Hosham Khalifa Kamaly
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
322 RDS.
-
B. Objectives
On completion of the course the students should be able to:




Have an understanding of the anatomy and morphology of the pulp spaces.
Possess the knowledge of the fundamental operative procedures like access cavity
preparation, cleaning and shaping of the root canal system and to successfully obturate
the prepared root canal space.
Possess the complete knowledge of the various endodontic instruments, their
applications and the ability to identify them and differentiate them from one another.
Have the ability to perform endodontic procedures on the extracted maxillary incisor,
maxillary canine and maxillary 1st premolar.
The course is given to 4th year (7th semester) students as one lecture and one pre-clinical
practical session. The theoretical part covers topics which include an introduction to the
subject, anatomy and morphology of the root canal system, access cavity preparation,
cleaning and shaping of the root canal systems and obturation of the root canal and it
lays emphasis on possessing thorough knowledge of the various endodontic
instruments. The pre-clinical practical component focuses on the treatment of anterior
and premolar teeth. The course is given as one lecture and one pre-clinical session per
week, equivalent to 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.
Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Preclinical Endodontics I | Page - 162
S.No.
1.
2.
3.
TOPICS
Introduction To Endodontics And Its
Scope, Indications And
Contraindications
Pulp Space, Morphology And Anatomy
 Pulp chamber, Root canal, Accessory
canals, Apical foramen
 Anatomy and morphology of maxillary
teeth
 Anatomy and morphology of
mandibular teeth
Coronal Cavity Preparation


4.
Principles of endodontic cavity
preparation
Coronal cavity preparation for anterior
teeth
 Coronal cavity preparation for
posterior teeth
Radicular Cavity Preparation
 Pulpectomy procedure
 Working length determination
NO. OF WEEKS
CREDIT HOURS
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
 Irrigation
 Intracanal medicaments
5.
6.
 Techniques for cleaning and shaping
Instruments and Instrumentation
 Root canal instruments
 Mechanical instrumentation
Obturation Of Radicular Space

Techniques of obturation


S.No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Materials used for obturation
Endodontic sealers
Practical exercise
Identification of basic endodontic
instruments and materials.
Mounting of extracted teeth in wax blocks
and demonstration of application of
rubber dam.
Coronal access cavity preparation and
working length determination on
extracted maxillary central incisors
mounted on wax blocks.
Cleaning and shaping of root canal space
with irrigation of extracted maxillary
central incisors mounted on wax blocks.
Obturation of the root canal space
followed by closure of the access cavity
(with temporary filling material) of the
extracted maxillary central incisors
mounted on wax blocks.
extracted maxillary canine mounted on
wax blocks.
with irrigation of extracted maxillary
canine mounted on wax blocks.
extracted maxillary canine mounted on
wax blocks.
extracted maxillary 1st premolar mounted
on wax blocks.
with irrigation of extracted maxillary 1st
premolar mounted on wax blocks.
NO. OF WEEKS
CREDIT HOURS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
extracted maxillary 1st premolar mounted
on wax blocks.
11.
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
III.
-
1
Internship
13
1
Others
-
Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semester
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Recognize the
Explanation
fundamentals of
utilising Microsoft
cavity preparation
power point
for endodontic
including pictures
treatment (both
Explanations by
coronal & radicular) drawing picture.
as well as
Interactions with
understanding the
the students to
principles
explain the
governing it.
concepts taught to
Recognize and
develop self
describe different
interest and
instrument used in
competition among
endodontics.
the fellow students
Recognize and
Preclinical
describe the
practical sessions
different techniques on mounted
& materials for
extracted teeth
obturation of the
preceded by hands
root canal.
on demonstration .
b. Cognitive
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
perception and
memory all of
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
the taught parts
Guiding students
following up the
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P),
clinical
requirements &
Final
examination(T/P)
Continuous
assessment in the
form of Quizzes &
Midterm
examination,
clinical
requirements and
Final examination-
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
which leading to
understanding,
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts
(both theoretical
and practical)
The students are
encouraged to have
an attitude for
commitment to
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff members, with
responsibility
towards finishing
all assignments on
time
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Know the basics of
communication and
information
technology, utilise
these skills in the
best way possible in
their assignment.
Use the instruments
required to perform
cavity preparation
both coronal as well
as radicular.
work at regular
time intervals
Theory/Practical
The students are
always encouraged
to the best and
assignments are
given deadlines to
be submitted.
Assignments on
theoretical aspects
required time
Practical
demonstrations of
what have been
taught theoretically
Practical
requirement are set
at a definite
number.
Team work is
encouraged by
allowing the
students to make
presentations in a
group.
The students are
guided to carry out
web based search
and encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative dentistry
and actively
involved in
circulating the
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
members
Live
demonstrations
critical evaluation
of the work done in
Assessment by the
staff members on
their behaviour and
attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment
Evaluate their
method of
collection of
e-based facts &
Assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the same.
The students will
have continuous
assessment on the
practical work
(accuracy and
Able to handle
engine driven
rotary
instrumentation in
a proper and safe
way
Proper use of the
materials used for
obturation.
constructive
manner
adjuncts in the
form of lectures or
illustrative
diagrams,
lab sessions on
artificial and
extracted teeth.
control in use of
hand and rotary
instruments as well
as proper handling
of obturating
materials) and the
students are
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
V.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Oral exam
Written Examss
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
20%
20%
10%
30%
D. Students support
1. Endodontics: Principles and Practice by Mahmoud Torabinejad DMD MSD PhD and
Richard E. Walton. 2008.
2. Ingle's Endodontics 6/e by John I. Ingle, Leif K. Bakland, J. Craig, and Ph.D. Baumgartner.
2007.
3. Problem Solving in Endodontics: Prevention, Identification, and Management by James
L. Gutmann, Thom Dumsha, and Paul Lovdahl. 2005.
4. PDQ Endodontics, 2nd edition by John Ide Ingle. 2009.
5. Clinical Endodontics: A Textbook by Leif Tronstad. 2008.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.




strategies.
strategies.
PERIODONTICS I
1. Institution:
2. College:
Jazan University
Dentistry
Periodontics I, 431 PDS
b. Credit hours
4
Dentistry
d. Name of faculty member responsible for Prof. Ebtessam Elzefzaf
course
Dr. Mohammad Sabir
Dr. Sameena Sultana
Dr. Reda Saber
312 MDS
Shwajrah
B. Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and apply
information presented relevant to the:
1. Recognition of normal macro/microanatomy of the periodontal tissues.
2. Classification of the gingival and periodontal diseases and its relevancy to clinical
practice.
3. Epidemiology of the periodontal diseases and its relevancy to clinical practice.
4. Tobacco use and nicotine dependence in the clinical management of periodontal
patient.
5. The role of microbiology and immunology in the initiation and progression of
periodontal diseases.
6. Risk assessment and genetic factors for individual patients and the population at
large.
Periodontology I is a didactic course for seventh semester dental students. This course
will provide an introduction to the science and art of Periodontics, emphasizing
classification and epidemiology of periodontal diseases; macro/microanatomy of the
normal periodontium and a clinical overview of the etiology of periodontal diseases is
presented and discussed. Dental plaque and calculus, host defense and immunepathological mechanisms are also presented. Clinical, histo-pathological and
pathogenesis of gingivitis and periodontitis, risk assessment, tobacco use and systemic
diseases are explored and presented.
Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Periodontics I | Page - 170
I.
Topics- Lectures



Introduction to Periodontology
Classification of Gingival and Periodontal Diseases
The Normal Periodontium
 Gingiva
 Periodontal ligament
 Aging and the Periodontium
 Epidemiology of Gingival and Periodontal Diseases
 Microbiology of Periodontal Diseases - Part I
 Microbiology of Periodontal Diseases - Part II
 Immunity Interactions and Periodontal Diseases -Part I
 Immunity Interactions and Periodontal Diseases - Part II
 Tobacco Use and Periodontal Diseases
 Periodontal Pathology-Gingival Diseases - Part I
 Periodontal Pathology-Gingival Diseases - Part II
Total
Topics-Practical
 Infection control procedures – dental operatory
 Recording patient’s medical history - student partner
 Soft tissue examination on student partner.
 Hard tissue exams will be done on student partner
 Recording plaque index on student partner
 Provide oral hygiene instruction
 Periodontal examination on model
 Periodontal probing on typhodont, periodontal
assessment and periodontal charting
 Periodontal charting on models and on student partner
 Instrumentation principles and patient/clinician
positioning
 Hand Scaling practice on models
 Oral prophylaxis (student pair switch) and
communicate with patient and will learn about
periodontal radiology
 Treatment planning
 Management of medical emergencies in dental office
Total
No. Of
Weeks
1
1
2
Contact hours
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
13
1
2
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
14
3
3
42
II. COURSE COMPONENT
Lectures
13
Tutorials
--
Clinical
14
II.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate on
theoretical
several important
knowledge related
to Periodontics into points associated
with assigned
clinical practice.
readings. The
purposes of the
lectures are to
increase the
understanding and
to complement the
assigned readings.
a replacement of
the assigned
readings and other
resources.
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions (MCQ)
based on materials
from the lectures
and assigned
readings from the
text book.
2-Short answer type
questions
3-True/False type
questions
examination and
treatment planning
5-oral exam
c. Interpersonal
& 1-Develop
Responsibilities
awareness into
towards
1-Oral semistructure interview
(to demonstrate the
ability of
b. Cognitive
1-Demonstrate
ability to use self
knowledge and
decision on
working with
and teacher.
with patients.
3-Demonstrate
knowledgeable skill
performance in
carrying out
specific periodontal
clinical procedures.
1-Lectures,
periodontal exam
on models,
treatment planning
on partner,
Small group
activity rotation
Communication
with Patients and
Radiology)
2-Seminars to
insure the
appropriate
application of
different clinical
concepts.
3-Case study to
develop rationales
for periodontal
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment planning.
1-Video taping of
actual students
interactions in
groups or one-to-
Student’s cognitive
skill will be
evaluated on the
basis of
participation,
professionalism and
attendance.
periodontal
diseases
2-Value one’s own
mental health
practices as a
professional
general dental
practitioner.
one student patient
plays) to teach
dynamics of
interaction.
2- Direct
interaction with
patients (real-life
simulation) to
apply and critique
d. Communication
Use of web based
Information
material related to
Technology
& Periodontology.
Numerical skills
Group tutorial to
facilitate selection
& utilization of
appropriate web
based periodontal
material.
a) skillful scaling
procedures on
patients
b) improving
tactile sensation
while probing
subgingival areas
c) Probing and
handling hard and
soft tissues
d) Administer local
anesthesia
injections with
minimal pain and
discomfort
a) Carrying out
scaling procedures
with skill and
dexterity
b) Appropriate and
effective selection
of armamentarium
for clinical
procedures
c) Ability to be
ambidextrous as
and when required
d) Develop high
levels of tactile
sensations for finer
1. Hand-eye coordination (to aid in
proper harmless
and uneventful
treatment to the
patient and also the
supporting staff)
2. Manual dexterity
communication
with patients)
2- Seminar (to
present project
outcome as a
demonstration of
ability to apply
interviewing and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication
skills between
students and
patients.
Assignments (to
present recent
different topic
related to
periodontal
therapy).
a) Evaluation of the
case/patient by the
staff
b) Assessment of
work done by
grading.
clinical procedures
3.High visual acuity
III.
a) Developing high
level of imagination
in relation to three
dimensions to think
and
operate in different
clinical conditions
b) Ability to carry
out different
clinical procedures
using indirect
vision (mirror
images)
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
Midterm
40%
60%
 Quiz
 Viva voce
Quiz II
Practical Exams
Written Exams


Quiz
Viva voce
Proportion
10%


10%
20%
10%
10%


30%
10%
D. Students support
1. Carranza’s Clinical Periodontology: Newman, Takei, Klokkevold and Carranza, 10 th
edition, W. B. Saunders Co., 2006
2. Manual of Clinical Periodontics: A Reference Manual for Diagnosis & Treatment (LexiComp's Dental Reference Library) by Francis G. Serio and Charles E., Ph.D. Hawley. 2009.
Neild-Gehrig, Jill S.
3. Fundamentals of Periodontal Instrumentation and Advanced Root Instrumentation, 6th
ed. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, 2007
4. Practical Periodontal Plastic Surgery by Serge Dibart and MamdouhKarima. 2006.
5. Periodontics by Barry M. Eley BDS FDSRCS PhD, Mena Soory FDSRCS PhD FHEA, and J.
D. Manson. 2009.
6. Practical Advanced Periodontal Surgery by Serge Dibart. 2007.
7. Periodontics & Restorative Maintenance: A Clinical Atlas by Naoshi Sato. 2009.
8. Comprehensive Periodontics for the Dental Hygienist (3rd Edition) by Mea A. Weinberg,
Cheryl Westphal, Stuart J. Froum, and Milton Palat. 2009.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
8 T H SEMESTER
FOURTH YEAR
EIGHT SEMESTER
CODE
413 MDS
414 MDS
422 RDS
424 RDS
432 PDS
433 PDS
442 SDS
444 SDS
TOTAL
COURSE TITLE
Sciences II
Clinical Oral &
Maxillofacial Surgery I
Operative Dentistry II
Preclinical Endodontics II
Periodontics II
Preclinical Pedodontics
Clinical Removable
Prosthodontics II
Preclinical Fixed
Prosthodontics II
8
TH
PR
CRH
COH
P-REQ
1
3
2
4
412 MDS
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
421 RDS
423 RDS
431 PDS
421 RDS
6
3
1
1
1
8
3
2
3
2
27
17
4
4
7
35
315 MDS
441 SDS
443 SDS
ORAL MEDICINE & DIAGNOSTIC SCIENCES II
Institution
College
Jazan University
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Sciences II, 413 MDS
3
Dentistry
Dr. Reda Sabra
Dr.Sameena Parveen
Dr. Tenny John
412 MDS
-
B- Objectives







Offer an appropriate dental management of the patient suffered from infectious diseases
including viral hepatitis and acquired immune deficiency disease (ADS)
Be able to identify the diabetic patients, based on oral clinical finding, order the proper
laboratory investigations.
Perform proper dental management to diabetic patients and other endocrinal disorders.
be well versed with the steps of Basic Life Support, and drugs and equipment of
emergencies
Know about the handling the patient in an emergency situations.
Be knowledgeable about patho-physiology, differential diagnosis, and treatment plan of
the diseases affecting the salivary glands.
Be able to identify the need to referral to specialist in situations demanding the same.
C-Course descriptions
This course allow dental students to establish the clinical and systemic manifestations,
diagnosis and treatment planning for diseases affect oral structures including salivary
gland diseases, infectious diseases. The course helps the students to identify and
management of oral complications of diabetes and other endocrinal disorders, to control
patient in emergency situations. The course is offered through lectures and clinical
practice in the eighth Semester and shall have two credit hours.
Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Oral Medicine & Diagnostic Sciences II | Page - 178
I.
Topic
Infectious diseases
Basic life support
Emergency kit
Diabetes mellitus
Endocrine disorders.
Total
II.
Date
No of weeks
3
1
1
3
2
2
12
Practical hours
3
3
3
3
3
3
36
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
one hour/week
One hour/week
Infectious diseases:
Bacterial infections
Chlamydial infections
st
1
Richetsial infections
week xxxxxx?
Fungal infections
Mucormycosis
2nd Viral infections
week Viral hepatitis
Viral infections
3rd
Human immune
week deficiency virus(HIV)
Contact hours
6
6
6
6
6
6
72
Internship
Three hours/week
Diagnosis of oral
infectious diseases
Examination and
(clinical and
diagnosis of patients
laboratory
with oral diseases
procedure).
Dental
management of
patients with viral
hepatitis and
methods required
to prevent cross
infection
Dental
management of
patients with HIV
infections and
methods required
to prevent cross
infection
Examination of
patients with oral
diseases
Infection control and
examination of
patients with oral viral
manifestations.
Others
∙ Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch.20.page481.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008.
Ch.20.page481.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan A
Ship.
2008.
Definition of
unconsciousness steps
4th
of Management (basic
week
life support)
Emergency drugs and
equipments
5th
Injectable drugs
week
Non injectable drugs
Diagnosis of patients
with salivary gland
diseases
Specific diseases and
th
6
disorders of the salivary
week gland:
Developmental
abnormalities
Sialolithasis and
Mucoceal
Systemic conditions
with salivary gland
7th
diseases.
week
Salivary gland tumers.
Management of
xerostomia
Preventive therapy
Symptomatic treatment
Salivary stimulation,
8th
treatment of underlying
week
systemic disorders
sialorrhea
description and
aetiology
clinical presentation
Application on
simulator
Management
(basic life
support)
Emergency drugs
and equipments
Injectable drugs
Noninjectable
drugs
Inflammatory and
reactive lesions
allergic
sialadenitis
Viral diseases
Bacterial diseases
involvment
Illustrate colour
atlas of salivary
gland diseases
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding salivary
gland diseases
Ch.20.page481.
Discussion about time
factor in basic life
support and different
steps
Identification of
injectable and non
injectable drug
samples
Examination of
patients with oral and
salivar gland diseases
Examination of
patients with oral and
salivary gland diseases
Examination of
patients with oral
diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch.8.page191.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch.8.page191
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch.8.page191
diagnosis and treatment
Diabetes mellitus:
Epidemiology
Patho-physiology
9th
Clinical presentations
week Diagnosis and
monitoring
complications
Management
th
10
Oral manifestations of
week DM
Dental management
Endocrine diseases
Pituitary gland
11th
Adrenal gland
week
Thyroid gland
Gonads and gonadal
dysfunction
12th
Parathyroid gland and
week
metabolic disorders
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding oral
presentations of
Diabetes mellitus
Illustrate colour
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding oral
presentations of
Diabetes mellitus
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
endocrinal
disorders
atlas of oral
medicine cases
regarding
endocrinal
disorders
Examination of
patients with oral
diseases. Assess
diabetic periodontitis
and other related
symptoms
Examination of
patients with oral
diseases
Examination of
patients with oral
diseases
Examination of
patients with oral
diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch 21 page
509 .
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch 21 page
509 .
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch 21 page
509
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e
by Greenberg,
Martin
Greenberg,
Michael Glick,
and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch 21 page
509
I I I- Assessment Schedule and weighting
Proportion
Task
MCQ’s I
40%
MCQ’s II
Mid term
Written
practical
Final term exam
60%
Oral exams
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a- Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate
on
theoretical
several
of
knowledge
important
related to oral
points
medicine and
associated with
diagnostic
assigned
science into
readings.
The
clinical practice. purposes of the
b- Cognitive
1-Demonstrate
ability to use self
knowledge and
decision
on
working
with
colleagues,
patients,
and
teacher.
2-Develop
a
dentist-patient
lectures are to
increase
the
understanding
and
to
complement the
assigned
readings.
The
lectures are not
a replacement of
the
assigned
readings
and
other resources.
1-Lectures, oral
medicine
and
diagnostic
science
exam
and
clinical
practice
on
patients,
treatment
planning
on
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
30%
20%
10%
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions (MCQ)
based
on
materials from the
lectures
and
assigned readings
from the text
book.
2-Short
answer
type questions
3-True/False type
questions
examination and
treatment
planning
5-oral exam
1-Student need to
complete
the
assigned clinical
experiences.
3-Select,
obtain
and
interpret
patient
data,
information and
radiographs to be
relationship
with patients.
3-Demonstrate
knowledgeable
skill
performance in
carrying out oral
medicine
and
diagnostic
science clinical
procedures.
c- Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d- Communication
Information
partner,
2-Small group
activity rotation
(Prophylaxisstudent
pair
switch,
Communication
with Patients).
3-Seminars to
insure
the
appropriate
application
of
different clinical
concepts.
4-Case study to
develop
rationales for
oral diseases
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment
planning.
5-Clinical
practice on
patients.
1-Develop
1-Video taping
actual
awareness into of
one’s
own student’s
attitude towards interactions in
groups or oneoral diseses.
to-one student
2-Value one’s
patient
own mental
interaction (or
health practices
role plays) to
as a professional teach dynamics
general dental
of interaction.
practitioner.
2- Direct
interaction with
patients (reallife simulation)
to apply and
critique
interpersonal
skills.
Use of web
based material
Group tutorial to
facilitate
able to use these
findings
to
accurately
diagnose
and
treat patients.
3-Formulate
a
comprehensive
diagnosis
and
treatment/referral
plan
for
the
management
of
patients.
4-Prevent, asses
and manage of
medical
and
dental
emergencies.
5- Diagnose and
manage
oral
diseases.
1-Atlas for oral
diseases
interview
(to
demonstrate the
ability
of
differential
diagnosis of oral
diseases
in
patients)
2- Seminar (to
present project
outcome as a
demonstration of
ability to apply
interviewing and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication
skills between
students and
patients.
Assignments (to
present recent
Technology &
Numerical skills
related to oral
medicine and
diagnostic
science.
e- Psychomotor skills
selection &
utilization of
appropriate web
based oral
medicine and
diagnostic
science.
different topic
related to the
treatment of oral
diseases
Learning resources
Scully. 2008.
Recommended books:
2002.
Lea & Febiger 1994.
4- A guide to common oral lesions Dr. Charles. Dunlap and Dr. Bruce. F, Barker
Department of Oral Maxillofacial pathologyUMCK School of dentistry.
1- Oral Diseaseshttp://www.blackwell-syngergy.com/loi/jop
2- Journals of oral pathology &medicin http//www.blackwell- syngergy.com/loi/jop
Other facilities:
a. Digital camera for documentation of clinical cases. a-Accommodation


Lecture rooms for 40-60 students
Labs for 40-60 students
c-Other resources
 Oral medicine conference room
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.


Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
CLINICAL ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgery I
414 MDS
2
Dentistry
Ashwin. J.
315MDS
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives











examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment.
Manage medical problems in dentistry like
management of Cardiovascular patients
management of endocrine disorder patients
management of gastrointestinal and renal disease patients
management of haematological disorder patients
management of liver and musculoskeletal disorder patients
management of immunodeficiency patients
management of women patients
medical emergency of unconscious patients
cardiopulmonary resuscitation
Should be able to identify instruments in OMFS
This course will be taught in oral surgery in 4th Year | 8th Semester. The course is intended to
cover one main topic that is managing medical problems in dentistry. Topics on medical
problems in dentistry will include how to assess patients on suitability for local anaesthesia.
They will also cover dental management of cardiovascular patients, endocrine disorder patients,
gastrointestinal and renal disease patients, haematological disorder patients, liver and
Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery I | Page - 187
musculoskeletal disorder patients, immunodeficiency patients, and management of women
patients. Lastly, the course deals with the medical emergencies and diagnostic tools in Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery. In the clinics the student will learn to perform CPR and, manage medical
emergencies such as syncope, adrenal insufficiency, and control bleeding.
I.
Topics
1. Management of Cardiovascular patients
2. Management of endocrine disorder patients
3. Management of gastrointestinal and renal disease
patients
4. Management of haematological disorder patients
5. Management of liver and musculoskeletal disorder
patients
6. Management of immunodeficiency patients
7. Management of women patients
8. Medical emergency I
9. Medical emergency II
10. Medical emergency III
11. Diagnostic tools in OMFS
II.
Course Component
Lectures
11
III.
Tutorials
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
4
1
4
1
1
4
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
Internship
11
Others
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Manage medically
Lectures.
compromised
patients
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
b. Cognitive
Identify Medically
compromised
patients
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Should follow
proper protocol for
regular clinical
attendance.
Demonstrate
with staff.
Should develop
good working
relations with his
professional
colleagues.
Should wear a neat
apron/lab coat with
name tag.
Ensure proper
handling of
patients
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
knowledge on Oral
surgery by
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
by students.
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on Oral
Surgery.
Registration of
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
Continuous
evaluation during
the course
increased use of
internet/web based
information
Should develop
skills for
identifying and
managing medically
compromised
patients
online journals
with students
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
1. Medical Problems in Dentistry- Scully, Cawson- 5th edition
Benson. 2007.
Chris Jo. 2007.
a. Accommodation
 Recovery Room
 Scrub Area
c. Other resources



Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:
 Viva
Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the
department:
Processes for improvement of teaching:





improvement.
Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:
committee
whole
Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
OPERATIVE DENTISTRY II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Operative Dentistry II,
422RDS
2
Dentistry
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
4th Year | 8thSemester
421 RDS
shawajrah
B. Objectives








Know the various bonding techniques
Understand the concepts of cavity preparations for composite restorations on
patients
Know how to finish and polish the composite restorations
Know the adverse effects while preparing cavity preparation and recognize
mechanisms through which these effects are produced and also efforts should be
made to minimize it.
know the most likely side effects of materials and how to prevent the same
Know in detail about the various Non-Carious Lesions
Be able to perform glass ionomer restorations on the patients
Be able to do compound class I amalgam restorations on the patients
This course is provided by the Restorative department during the second semester of
the fourth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and clinics, in which the former
includes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes the application of the
The course is given as one lecture and one lab session per week for the whole semester
and will have 2 credit hours and four contact hours.
In this course the students will be trained to minimize the adverse effects while
preparing cavities with high speed equipments, minimize the side effects of restorative
materials, prepare cavities and restore with composite resin on patients, prepare
Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Operative Dentistry II | Page - 193
compound class I cavities and restore with amalgam restorative material on patients,
recognize & manage non carious lesions.
I.
Topics
No. of
credit
hours
Contact
hours
1
Adhesive & Adhesion
2
2
3
Class V composite Cavity Preparation & restoration
1
1
2
Class I composite Cavity Preparation & restoration
4
Finishing & Polishing Of Composite restoration
5
Biological Considerations during Tooth Preparation
6
Selection of Restorative Materials
7
Biological Considerations of Restorative Materials
8
Non Carious Lesions
9
Glass Ionomer Restorations
SI
NUM
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
CLINICS
Compound Amalgam restorations
Conventional glass ionomer restorations
modified glass ionomer restorations
Simple composite restorations
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14
--III.
1
Practical
14
Others
---
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Explanation
Develop Proper
utilising Microsoft
bonding technique
power point
including pictures
Techniques for the Explanations by
use of composite
drawing pictures
material for
Interactions with
Classes III, and V
the students to
restorations.
explain the
concepts taught to
Manage non carious develop self
lesions
interest and
competition among
Perform restoration the fellow students
of teeth with glass
Complete
ionomer cement in
supervision and
patients
instruction on each
clinical case
Understand the
concept of selection
of proper
restorative material
and its biological
effects
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P) &
Final
examination(T/P)
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
concentration,
perception and
nevertheless
memory all of
which leading to
understanding ,
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts
(both theoretical
and practical ) at
any given time.
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
some parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes
Midterm
examination(T/P) &
Final
examination(T/P)
The students are
The student are
Assesment of
Clinical
demonstrations ,
case presentation
and supervision
encouraged to have
an attitude for
commitment to
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff members/
patients, with
responsibility
towards finishing
all cases on time.
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Develop the ability
to discuss the
differential
diagnosis of the
disease with fellow
members and
present the case
orally
Know the basics of
communication and
information
technology, utilise
way possible in
their assignments
ability to utilise
electronic librarye,journals.
always encouraged
to the best in
friendly way, and
cases are given and
completed
requirement are set
at a definite
number
The students
are guided to
carry out web
based search
and encouraged
to collect
material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative
dentistry and
actively involve
in circulating
the
electronically
collected
material with
the fellow
colleagues and
staff members.
Be able to apply
Clinical
rubber dam without demonstrations
harming the patient
Develop dexterity
critical evaluation
of the clinical work
clinical cases and
their completion
and follow up at a
Assignments on
theoretical aspects
required time
.Assesment by the
staff members on
their behaviour /
rapport with the
patients and
attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment/clinical
cases required
Evaluate their
method of
assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the same.
The students will
have continuous
assessment on the
practical work and
the students are
to manipulate &
restore the teeth
with glass ionomer
cements
in a constructive
manner.
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
Able to provide the
patient /build up
and provide the
treatment best way
possible and
keeping the
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Mid term practical
exam
60%
Final Written Exams
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
30%
30%
D. Students support
b- Dr Abbas Rizvi
J. Swift. 2006.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:




Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRECLINICAL ENDODONTICS II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
424 RDS
2
Dentistry
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
423 RDS
Shawajarah
B. Objectives






Have complete understanding of the various pulp and peri-radicular disease conditions
and the ability to differentiate them from one another.
Possess the knowledge of various micro-organisms causing the pulpal and per-radicular
lesions.
Adequately select proper cases for endodontic treatment and also be able to plan the
necessary treatment leading to a successful endodontic outcome.
Have the knowledge of management of the vital pulp.
Have an understanding of the diagnosis in endodontics along with the ability to
accurately diagnose the various conditions requiring endodontic intervention.
Perform endodontic procedures on extracted maxillary and mandibular first and
second molars and perform the retreatment procedure on the extracted maxillary
central incisors.
The course is given to 4th year (8th semester) students as one lecture and one pre-clinical
practical session. The theoretical part covers topics which include pulp pathology,
endodontic microbiology, vital pulp therapy, case selection and treatment planning,
diagnosis and diagnostic procedures. The pre-clinical lab/practical component focuses
on performing endodontic procedures on molars and retreatment of the already
obturated maxillary central incisors. This prepares the students to perform basic
endodontic procedures prior to entering the clinics in the fifth year. The course is given
as one lecture and one pre-clinical session per week, equivalent to 2 credit hours and 4
contact hours.
Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Preclinical Endodontics II | Page - 200
S.No.
1.
2.
TOPICS
Structure And Function Of Pulp
Pulp Pathology
 Etiology
 Reversible & irreversible pulpitis
 Chronic hyperplastic pulpitis
NO. OF WEEKS
CREDIT HOURS
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
 Internal resorption
 Pulp degeneration
 Pulp necrosis
3.
4.
5.
 Physical and chemical causes of pulp
disease
 Patho-physiology of pulp disorders
 Endodontic implications
Endodontic Microbiology And Asepsis
 Aerobic and anaerobic bacteria
 Bacterial pathways into the pulp
 Bacteriological examination
 Sterilization
 Disinfection
 Barrier techniques
Case Selection And Treatment Planning
 Indications and local contraindications
for root canal treatment
 Systemic conditions contraindicated for
root canal treatment
 Pulp less teeth as abutments
 Pulp less teeth and orthodontic
treatment
VITAL PULP THERAPY
 Direct and indirect pulp capping
 Pulpotomy, apexification and
apexogenesis
6.
DIAGNOSIS
History taking




3
3
Chief complaint
Medical and dental history
History of present condition
Maintaining records
Examination




Visual examination
Visual inspection
Palpation and percussion
Mobility and depressibility
Radiographs





IOPA
Bite wing
Occlusal
Xeroradiography
RVG
Vitality Testing
 Thermal stimulation
 Electrical stimulation
 Direct dentin stimulation
OTHER TESTS
 Anesthetic test
 Test cavity
S.No.
1.
2.
3.
Practical exercise
extracted maxillary 1st molar mounted on
wax blocks.
with irrigation of extracted maxillary 1st
molar mounted on wax blocks.
NO. OF WEEKS
CREDIT HOURS
1
1
1
1
1
1
extracted maxillary 1st molar mounted on
wax blocks.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
extracted mandibular 1st molar mounted
on wax blocks.
with irrigation of extracted mandibular 1st
molar mounted on wax blocks.
extracted mandibular 1st molar mounted
on wax blocks.
extracted mandibular 2nd molar mounted
on wax blocks.
with irrigation of extracted mandibular
2nd molar mounted on wax blocks.
extracted mandibular 2nd molar mounted
on wax blocks.
Retrieval of gutta percha cones from the
root canal of maxillary central incisors
followed by cleaning and shaping and
irrigation of the root canal.
Preparation of post space in the maxillary
central incisors after removal of gutta
percha from the coronal and middle one
thirds.
I.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
II.
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Internship
13
Others
-
Additional learning hours expected for students – 20/ Semester
III.
Skills
Description
Teaching
Method of Assessment
strategies
a. Knowledge
Recognize the
Explanation
Continuous assessments
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
various
pathologies
related to the
pulp and the
related microorganisms
involved.
utilising Microsoft
power point
including pictures
Explanations by
drawing pictures.
Interactions with
the students to
explain the
concepts taught to
develop self
interest and
competition
among the fellow
students.
Preclinical
practical session
on mounted
extracted teeth
preceded by
hands on
demonstration.
and discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P),
Clinical requirements &
Final examination(T/P)
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in
good
concentration,
perception and
memory all of
which leading to
understanding,
recollection,
reproduction of
the taught
concepts (both
theoretical and
practical) at any
given time.
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
the taught parts
in the form of Quizzes &
Recognize the
various
methods of
Patient
education and
motivation in
the prevention
and treatment
of the pulp
diseases.
Recognize the
various
indications,
advantages,
techniques, and
limitations of
root canal
treatment.
The students
are encouraged
to have an
attitude for
commitment to
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Practical
demonstrations of
what have been
taught
theoretically
The students are
always
encouraged to the
best and
assignments are
Midterm examination,
Clinical requirements
and
Final examinationTheory/Practical
Assignments on
theoretical aspects that
is delivered at a
required time
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
e. Psychomotor
skills
succeed in the
field, work well
with the fellow
students and
maintain good
relationship
with staff
members, with
responsibility
towards
finishing all
assignments on
time.
given deadlines to
be submitted.
Use the
instruments
required to
perform cavity
preparation
both coronal as
well as
radicular.
Live
demonstrations
Know the basics
of
communication
and information
technology,
utilise these
skills the best
way possible in
their
assignment
able to handle
engine driven
rotary
instrumentation
in a proper and
safe way
Proper use of
the materials
used for
practical
requirement are
set at a definite
number.
Team work is
encouraged by
allowing the
students to make
presentations in a
group.
The students are
guided to carry
out web based
search and
encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative
dentistry and
actively involved
in circulating the
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
colleagues and
staff members.
Critical
evaluation of the
work done in
constructive
manner
Adjuncts in the
form of lectures
or illustrative
diagrams,
Assessment by the staff
members on their
behaviour and
attendance
Issuing deadlines on a
given assignment
Evaluate their method
of collection of
e-based facts &
Assessment of the
method and duration of
time involving the same.
The students will have
continuous assessment
on the practical work
(accuracy and control in
use of hand and rotary
instruments as well as
proper handling of
obturating materials)
and the students are
expected to fulfil the
requirements set.
Lab sessions on
artificial teeth.
obturation.
IV.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Oral Exam
Written Exams
D. Students support
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
20%
20%
10%
30%
2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PERIODONTICS II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Jazan University
Dentistry
Periodontics II, 432 PDS
4
Dentistry
Dr. Ebtessam ELZefzaf
Dr. Mohammad Sabir
Dr. Sameena Sultana
Dr. Reda Saber
431 PDS
Shwajrah
B. Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and apply
1. Impact of periodontal inflammation on systemic health.
2. Periodontal clinical and radiographic examinations, risk assessments, prognosis and
treatment planning.
3. Principals of non-surgical periodontal therapy.
4. Clinical recognition and clinical management of periodontal emergencies.
5. Periodontal treatment for older and female patient and aggressive forms of
periodontitis.
6. Principals of clinical case presentation, patient education, motivation and oral
hygiene products.
Periodontology II is a didactic course for eight semester dental students. Eight semester
clinical experience will be enhanced by student’s knowledge that has been gained
through their basic science courses as well as their pre-clinical didactic and laboratory
courses. This course will provide preventive and therapeutic clinical procedures
associated with the diagnosis, prognosis, and treatment planning. Initial phase of
periodontal therapy will be discussed. This course will discuss periodontal radiographs,
periodontal treatment plan and its rationale with emphasis on patient education,
motivation and treatment of periodontal emergencies.
Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Periodontics II | Page - 209
I.












Topics
Periodontal Pathology-Periodontal Diseases – part I
Periodontal Pathology-Periodontal Diseases: Part II
Clinical diagnosis
Advance diagnostic techniques
Radiographic aids in diagnosis of periodontal diseases
Risk assessment and prognosis
Clinical significance in periodontal diseases
Periodontal treatment plan and rationale of treatment
Non-surgical periodontal therapy
Patient education and motivation
Oral hygiene aids and agents
Periodontal emergencies
No. of Weeks
2
Contact hours
2
1
2
1
2
2
Total
TOPICS : PRACTICAL
 Periodontal assessment
 Record keeping
 Ultrasonic instrumentation on typodont
 Application of desensitizing agents
 Establishment and maintenance of a healthy dental
patient
 Scaling and polishing
Total
COURSE COMPONENT
Lectures
12
Tutorials
--
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
13
39
13
39
Practical/Fieldwork/Clinical
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate on
theoretical
several important
knowledge related
with assigned
clinical practice.
readings. The
purposes of the
lectures are to
13
II.
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions (MCQ)
based on materials
from the lectures
and assigned
readings from the
text book.
b. Cognitive
1-Demonstrate
ability to use selfknowledge and
decision on
working with
and teacher.
with patients.
3-Demonstrate
knowledgeable skill
performance in
carrying out
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
1-Develop
awareness into
towards
periodontal
increase the
understanding and
to complement the
assigned readings.
a replacement of
the assigned
readings and other
resources.
1-Lectures,
periodontal exam
and clinical practice
on models,
treatment planning
on partner,
2-Small group
activity rotation
Communication
with Patients and
Radiology). It will
also include a clinic
orientation,
radiology
orientation, and a
local anaesthesia
laboratory.
3-Seminars to
insure the
appropriate
application of
different clinical
concepts.
4-Case study to
develop rationales
for periodontal
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment planning.
5-Clinical practice
on patients.
1-Video taping of
actual student’s
interactions in
2-Short answer type
questions
3-True/False type
questions
examination and
treatment planning
5-Viva voce
1-Student need to
complete the
assigned clinical
experiences.
2-Select, obtain and
interpret patient
data, information
and radiographs to
be able to use these
findings to
accurately assess
and treat patients.
3-Formulate a
comprehensive
diagnosis and
treatment/referral
plan for the
management of
patients.
4-Prevent asses and
manage of medical
and dental
emergencies.
5-Prevent, identify
and manage
periodontal
disorders.
(to demonstrate the
ability of
communication
diseases
2-Value one’s own
mental health
practices as a
professional
general dental
practitioner.
plays) to teach
dynamics of
interaction.
2- Direct
interaction with
patients (real-life
simulation) to
apply and critique
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Use of web based
material related to
Periodontology.
proper harmless
and uneventful
treatment to the
supporting staff)
Group tutorial to
& utilization of
appropriate web
based periodontal
material.
a) Skillful scaling
procedures on
patients
b) Improving
tactile sensation
while probing
subgingival areas
c) Probing and
handling hard and
soft tissues
d) Administer local
anesthesia
injections with
minimal pain and
discomfort
a) Carrying out
scaling procedures
with skill and
dexterity
b) Appropriate and
effective selection
of armamentarium
for clinical
procedures
c) Ability to be
ambidextrous as
and when required
d) Develop high
levels of tactile
2. Manual dexterity
with patients)
2- Seminar (to
present project
outcome as a
demonstration of
ability to apply
interviewing and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication
skills between
students and
patients.
Assignments (to
present recent
different topic
related to
periodontal
therapy.
case/patient by the
staff
b) Assessment of
work done by
grading.
III.
clinical procedures
a) Developing high
dimensions to think
and
clinical conditions
b) Ability to carry
out different
clinical procedures
using indirect
vision (mirror
images)
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
Midterm
40%
60%
 Quiz
 Viva voce
Quiz II
Practical Exams
Written Exams


Proportion
10%


10%
20%
10%
10%


30%
10%
Quiz
Viva voce
D. Students support
2. Manual of Clinical Periodontics: A Reference Manual for Diagnosis & Treatment
(Lexi-Comp's Dental Reference Library) by Francis G. Serio and Charles E., Ph.D.
Hawley. 2009. Neild-Gehrig, Jill S.
3. Fundamentals of Periodontal Instrumentation and Advanced Root Instrumentation,
6th ed. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, 2007
5. Periodontics by Barry M. Eley BDS FDSRCS PhD, Mena Soory FDSRCS PhD FHEA, and
J. D. Manson. 2009.
8. Comprehensive Periodontics for the Dental Hygienist (3rd Edition) by Mea A.
Weinberg, Cheryl Westphal, Stuart J. Froum, and Milton Palat. 2009.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee

Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as a
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRECLINICAL PEDODONTICS
1. Institution:
2. College:
Credit hours
Program in which course offered
Name of faculty member responsible for course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Preclinical Pedodontics,
433 PDS
2 (1+1)
BDS
DR. GUNA SEKHAR MADIRAJU
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
421 RDS
Al-Sawajrah campus
B. Objectives:









Have knowledge of normal development and chronology of primary and permanent
dentition.
Be able to identify primary/permanent teeth and the differences between them.
Have knowledge on dental caries and various pulpal diseases and their diagnosis in
children.
List materials suitable for the restoration of primary and young permanent teeth.
Be able to perform simple restorations including ART in primary and permanent teeth.
Have knowledge of basic Pediatric endodontic & preventive procedures in children.
Have knowledge of the use of stainless steel crowns in primary teeth.
Have knowledge of the indications and fabrication of space maintainers following
premature loss of a primary tooth.
Have knowledge of oral habits in children and fabrication of removable habit breaking
appliances.
The preclinical Pedodontics course is the first course in Pedodontics taken in the 4th
year/ 8th semester. This course provides an outline of the Pedodontics and serves as a
basis for preparing the students for the clinical Pedodontics in the forthcoming years. It
has a Theory and a Practical component. The theory component has 1 credit hour per
week and provides knowledge on the aims and scope of Pedodontics; development &
chronology of eruption of primary/permanent dentition; differences between
Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Preclinical Pedodontics | Page - 216
primary/permanent dentition and their clinical significance; dental caries (ECC) and its
diagnosis/management in children; pulpal diseases in children with a special note on
Pediatric dental pharmacology; various basic restorative & preventive
materials/procedures used in children. The practical component includes sessions on
identification of primary/permanent teeth; manipulation of various restorative
materials used in Pedodontics; basic techniques in Pediatric operative dentistry like
simple cavity preparations on artificial primary teeth (Typhodont teeth simulating
natural teeth) will be taught; basic endodontic procedures including caries excavation
and ART; preventive procedures like application of topical fluorides and fissure
sealants; tooth preparation and use of stainless steel crowns on artificial teeth;
fabrication of removable space maintainers and habit breaking appliances will be taught
on study models.
I.
Topics to be covered (Theory)
Topics
Introduction , Aim, Scope of Pedodontics
Development/Chronology of Primary & Permanent teeth
eruption
Differences between primary & permanent teeth
Dental caries in children
Restorative materials in Pedodontics
Restorative procedures in Pedodontics
Pulpal diseases in children
Basic endodontic procedures in children
Pediatric dental pharmacology
Fluorides in dentistry
Stainless steel crowns in Pedodontics
Removable appliances in Pedodontics
TOTAL
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
13
Schedule for Practical sessions:
I.
Topics
Introduction to Pre-Clinical Pedodontics
No. of Weeks
Identification of Primary teeth
1
Identification of Permanent teeth
Differences between primary & permanent teeth
Manipulation of dental materials
Basic restorative procedures in Pedodontics (Typhodont teeth set)
Basic endodontic procedures in children (caries excavation; Access cavity
preparation)
Topical fluoride application
Stainless steel crowns – Tooth preparation/adaptation/cementation
Removable space maintainers/habit breaking appliances
TOTAL
I.
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
-
Practical (Credit hours)
13
1
1
3
2
1
2
2
13
Others
-
III.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Understand aims/scope of
Lectures (Black
Pedodontics.
board, A-V aids)
Chronology & Differences
Discussions with
between Primary &
students
Permanent teeth.
Demonstrations,
Various Restorative
audio-visual aids &
materials/techniques used in study models
Pedodontics.
Pre-clinical
Importance of Preventive
practical sessions
procedures and pulp therapy under regular
in children.
supervision by staff
Method of
Assessment
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final practical
exam
Spotters
Cognitive
Identification & Differences
between Primary &
Permanent teeth.
Selection of appropriate
restorative
material/technique.
Lectures.
Discussions with
students.
Demonstrations audio-visual aids &
study models
Pre-clinical
practical sessions
under regular
supervision by staff.
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final practical
exam
Continuous
evaluation during
the course.
Interpersonal
skills &
Responsibilities
Should follow proper
protocol for regular
attendance.
Demonstrate ethical
relationship with staff.
Should develop good
working relations with his
professional colleagues.
Should wear a neat lab coat
with name tag.
Ensure proper handling of
materials/equipment.
Enhance good staff-student
communication.
Use of library & web based
information to improve
knowledge related to
Pedodontics.
Pre-clinical
practical sessions
under regular
supervision by staff.
Continuous
evaluation during
the course.
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
Pedodontics.
Registration of
online journals
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
Interactive
sessions with
students.
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by
concerned staff
Evaluation of
assignments
Practical & Oral
exams
Communication,
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor
skills
Should develop skills for
performing
restorative/endodontic/
preventive procedures, both
under direct and indirect
vision.
Develop skills for fabricating
removable appliances
related to Pedodontics.
Audio-visual
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques
Assignments given
with a specific time
limit
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Quota requirements
for pre-clinical
work to improve
clinical efficiency
IV.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
50%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Continuous clinical evaluation
50%
Practical Exams
Spotters
Written Exams
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
20%
D. Students support
DR. GUNA SHEKHAR MADIRAJU
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
E. Learning resources:
Essential Text books:
1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent by Ralph E. McDonald DDS MS, David R. Avery
DDS MSD, and Jeffrey A. Dean. 2004.
2. Fundamentals of Pediatric Dentistry by Mathewson JR, Robert E Primosch. Quint
Pub Co. 1995
3. Pediatric Dentistry: Infancy through Adolescence by Pinkham JR, 3rd Edition, 1993.
Referral Text books:
1. A Manual of Pediatric Dentistry by Andlaw R.J, Rock W.P; Churchill Livingstone,
2000.
2. Handbook of Pediatric Dentistry by Angus C. Cameron and Richard P. Widmer. 2008.
3. Pediatric Dentistry by Richard.R.Welbury. Oxford University Press
4. Pedodontics: A clinical approach by Goran Koch, Mosby Co. 1994.
Periodicals/Journals:
1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry
2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry
3. Journal of Dentistry for Children
4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry
5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry
Miscellaneous:
1. Pedodontics with Interactive DVD-ROM by Marwah. 2008.
2. Mini Atlas of Pedodontics (Anshan Gold Standard Mini Atlas Series) by Nikhil
Marwah and Vijaya Prabha K. 2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor / Department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:

Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
9 T H SEMESTER
FIFTH YEAR
NINTH SEMESTER
CODE
511 MDS
512 MDS
521 RDS
523 RDS
531 PDS
533 PDS
541 SDS
543 SDS
TOTAL
COURSE TITLE
Science III
Clinical Oral &
Maxillofacial Surgery II
Operative Dentistry III
Clinical Endodontics I
Periodontics III
Pedodontics I
Clinical Removable
Prosthodontics III
Clinical Fixed
Prosthodontics I
8
TH
PR
CRH
COH
P-REQ
1
3
2
4
413 MDS
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
422 RDS
424 RDS
432 PDS
433 PDS
6
3
1
1
1
8
3
2
3
2
27
17
4
4
7
35
414 MDS
442 SDS
444 SDS
ORAL MEDICINE & DIAGNOSTIC SCIENCE III
Institution
College
Jazan University
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Sciences III, 511 MDS
2
Dentistry
Dr. Reda Sabra
Dr.Sameena Parveen
Dr. Tenny John
413 MDS
-
B. Objectives
By the end of the course the students should be able to:





Be able to outline and manage patients with oral diseases related to different bleeding
and clotting disorders, or hematologic diseases.
Be able to identify the need to referral to specialist in situations demanding the same.
Have thorough knowledge of the newly developed diagnostic techniques.
different lesions of the oral cavity.
different oral swellings, tumours and other lesions of the oral cavity.
This course will be offered through theory and practical sessions. The topics will cover,
the newly developed methods of diagnosis, how to differentiate between different
causes of pain, oral and dental management of patients with medical conditions. The
clinical sessions will be in support to the lectures taken on the topic, the course will be
taken in the ninth semester and have2 credit hours.
Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Oral Medicine & Diagnostic Science III | Page - 224
I- Topics to be covered
Topic
No of weeks
Bleeding and clotting disorders
Hematologic diseases
Peripheral exophytic lesions
Deferential diagnosis of cysts
Dental management of medically compromised
patients
Advanced diagnostic techniques
Oral manifestations of systemic diseases.
Halitosis
D.D of dental and non-dental pain
Total
I I- Course Component
Date
1st
week
2nd
week
Practical
hours
2
3
6
2
3
6
2
1
1
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
13
6
6
6
3
6
3
6
3
3
39
6
6
78
Lectures
Tutorials
Internship
Others
one hour/week
One
hour/week
Three hours/week
-
Bleeding and
clotting disorders:
Pathophysiology
Clinical and
laboratory
findings
General
classification
Vessel wall
disorder
Platelets disorders
Bleeding and
clotting disorders
Coagulation
disorder:
Congenital
coagulopathies
Anti coagulant
related
coagulopathies
Diseases related
Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
bleeding and
clotting
disorders
Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
bleeding and
clotting
disorders
Dental
management of
Contact
hours
Examination and
diagnosis of patients
with oral diseases
with oral diseases.
Laboratory tests to
reach to the correct
diagnosis
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A. Ship. 2008.
Ch.17.page411.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008.
Ch.17.page411.
coagulopathies
3rd
week
4th
week
5th
week
6th
week
7th
week
Hematologic
diseases :
Red blood cell
disorders
Erythrocytosis
Polycythemia
verra
Anemia
hemoglbinopathie
s
Hematologic
diseases :
White blood cell
disorders
Quantitative
leukocyte
disorders
Qualitative
leukocyte
disorders
Leukaemia
Lymphoma
Multiple myeloma
Tumers of oral
cavity:
Benign tumers
Malignant tumers
of oral cavity
Dental
management of
patients with
bleeding and
clotting
disorders
Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases
regarding
Hematologic
diseases
Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
oral and
maxillofacial
cysts
Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
Hematologic
diseases
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases
Differentiation
between
benign and
malignant
tumers
Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
∙ Examination of
patients with oral
diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008.
Ch.16.page385.
with oral diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008.
Ch.16.page385.
with oral diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008
with oral diseases
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008
with oral diseases
Carranza’s Clinical
Periodontology:
medically
compromised
patients
8th
week
9th
week
10th
week
11th
week
12th
week
Dental
management of
medically
compromised
patients
Advanced
diagnostic
techniques
Describe oral
manifestations of
systemic diseases.
Halitosis
D.D of dental and
non dental pain
oral medicine
cases regarding
oral lesion
associated with
systemic
diseases
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
oral lesion
associated with
systemic
diseases
Practice the
advanced
diagnostic
techniques
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
oral
manifestations
of systemic
diseases.
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
oral
presentations
of Diabetes
mellitus
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
endocrinal
disorders
Newman, Takei,
Klokkevold and
Carranza, 10th
edition, W. B.
Saunders Co., 2006.
with oral diseases
with oral diseases
with oral diseases
with oral diseases
with oral diseases
Periodontology:
Newman, Takei,
Klokkevold and
Carranza, 10th
edition, W. B.
Saunders Co., 2006.
Periodontology:
Newman, Takei,
Klokkevold and
Carranza, 10th
edition, W. B.
Saunders Co., 2006.
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008
Burket's Oral
Medicine 11/e by
Greenberg, Martin
Greenberg, Michael
Glick, and Jonathan
A Ship. 2008
Oral and
Maxillofacia
l Medicine:
The Basis of
Diagnosis
and
Treatment
by Crispian
Scully.
2008.
13th
week
D.D of dental and
non dental pain
∙ Illustrate
colour atlas of
oral medicine
cases regarding
endocrinal
disorders
with oral diseases
I I I- Assessment schedule and weighting
Proportion
Task
MCQ’s I
40%
MCQ’s II
Mid term
Written
practical
Final term exam
60%
Oral exams
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a- Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate
on
theoretical
several
of
knowledge related
important
points
to oral medicine
associated
with
and diagnostic
assigned readings.
science into clinical
The purposes of the
practice.
lectures are to
increase
the
understanding and
to complement the
assigned readings.
a replacement of
the
assigned
readings and other
Oral and
Maxillofacia
l Medicine:
The Basis of
Diagnosis
and
Treatment
by Crispian
Scully.
2008.
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
30%
20%
10%
IV.
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions
(MCQ)
based on materials
from the lectures
and
assigned
readings from the
text book.
2-Short
answer
type questions
3-True/False type
questions
examination
and
treatment planning
b- Cognitive
c- Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
1-Demonstrate
ability to use self
knowledge
and
decision
on
working
with
and teacher.
with patients.
3-Demonstrate
knowledgeable skill
performance
in
carrying out oral
medicine
and
diagnostic science
resources.
1-Lectures,
oral
medicine
and
diagnostic science
exam and clinical
practice
on
patients, treatment
planning
on
partner,
2-Small
group
activity
rotation
Communication
with Patients).
3-Seminars
to
insure
the
appropriate
application
of
different
clinical
concepts.
4-Case study to
develop rationales
for oral diseases
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment planning.
5-Clinical practice
on patients.
1-Develop
1-Video taping of
student’s
awareness
into actual
interactions
in
towards
oral groups or one-toone student patient
diseses.
2-Value one’s own
plays) to teach
mental health
dynamics
of
practices as a
interaction.
professional
2- Direct
general dental
interaction with
practitioner.
patients (real-life
simulation) to
apply and critique
5-oral exam
1-Student need to
complete
the
assigned
clinical
experiences.
interpret
patient
data, information
and radiographs to
be able to use these
findings
to
accurately diagnose
and treat patients.
3-Formulate
a
comprehensive
diagnosis
and
treatment/referral
plan
for
the
management
of
patients.
4-Prevent,
asses
and manage of
medical and dental
emergencies.
5- Diagnose and
manage
oral
diseases.
1-Atlas for oral
diseases interview
(to demonstrate the
ability
of
differential
diagnosis of oral
diseases
in
patients)
2- Seminar (to
present project
outcome as a
demonstration of
ability to apply
interviewing and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication
skills between
d- Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
e- Psychomotor skills
Use of web based
material related to
oral medicine and
diagnostic science.
Group tutorial to
& utilization of
appropriate web
based oral
medicine and
diagnostic science.
students and
patients.
Assignments (to
present recent
different topic
related to the
treatment of oral
diseases
Learning resources
Scully. 2008.
3. A guide to common oral lesions Dr. Charles. Dunlap and Dr. Bruce. F, Barker Department
of Oral Maxillofacial pathology. UMCK School of dentistry.
Recommended books:
2002.
Lea & Febiger 1994.
1- Oral Diseases http://www.blackwell-syngergy.com/loi/odi
2- Journals of Oral Pathology & Medicine http//www.blackwell- syngergy.com/loi/jop
Other facilities required for teaching and learning to achieve the above ILOs
Other facilities:
a. Digital camera for documentation of clinical cases. a-Accommodation


Lecture rooms for 40-60 students
Labs for 40-60 students



Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility
Computers with access to internet
Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals
c. Other resources
 Oral medicine conference room
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.



skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
CLINICAL ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgery II
512 MDS
2
Dentistry
Ashwin. J.
414MDS
Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives






examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment under the supervision of staff.
Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures such as diagnosis and
treatment plan of impaction, and manage complications of impactions under the
supervision of staff.
Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures, diagnosis for pre-prosthetic
surgeries, and manage complications under the supervision of staff.
Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures such as diagnosis for
endodontic surgeries, and manage complications under the supervision of staff.
Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures for incision and drainage for
oro-facial neck infections and manage complications under the supervision of staff.
Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures for cyst and tumours, and
manage complications under the supervision of staff.
This will be a clinical course in oral surgery that is designed to get the dental
Students trained to carry out more complicated minor oral surgical procedures under local
anaesthesia.
This course will be taught in oral surgery course in 5th Year | 9th Semester. The course is
intended to cover one main topic that is minor oral surgical procedures. Topics on minor oral
surgical procedures will include how to assess diagnosis and treatment plan of impaction, preCourse Specifications | 9th Semester | Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery II | Page - 233
prosthetic surgeries, endodontic surgeries, incision and drainage for oro-facial neck infections
including osteomyelitis, osteoradionecrosis, marsupialisation and enucleation for cyst and
tumours. In the clinics the student will learn to perform surgical removal of impacted teeth,
uncomplicated pre-prosthetic surgeries, biopsy of soft tissues, management of infections of
dental origin, management of impacted teeth which include flap design and suturing techniques
under faculty supervision. Students will also be introduced to hospital rules and protocol, which
include medical records, doctor’s orders, progress notes, laboratory and radiographical results,
graphics, operation notes and discharge summary.
I.
Topics
1. Impaction
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Pre-prosthetic surgery I
Pre-prosthetic surgery II
Oro-facial neck infections I
Oro-facial neck infections II
Oro-facial neck infections III
Endodontic surgeries
Cyst and tumours I
Cyst and tumours II
Cyst and tumours III
Medico legal considerations and ethics
II.
Course Component
Lectures
11
III.
Tutorials
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
Internship
11
4
4
4
4
Others
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Manage simple
Lectures.
impacted tooth,
pre-prosthetic
& demonstrations
surgeries ,
on patients/live
endodontic
models.
surgeries
Clinical sessions
under supervision
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery II | Page - 234
b. Cognitive
Identify patients for
simple impacted
tooth, preprosthetic surgeries
, endodontic
surgeries
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Should follow
proper protocol for
regular clinical
attendance.
Demonstrate
with staff.
Should develop
good working
relations with his
professional
colleagues.
Should wear a neat
apron/lab coat with
name tag.
Ensure proper
handling of
patients
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Orals/viva-voce
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on Oral
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
Continuous
evaluation during
the course
Numerical skills
knowledge on Oral
surgery by
increased use of
internet/web based
information
Should develop
skills for
identifying and
managing minor
oral surgical
procedures patients
Surgery.
Registration of
online journals
staff.
with students
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Textbook of General and Oral Surgery by Wray, Lee, Clark, and Stenhouse (2003).
Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery By Peterson, Ellis, Hupp, Tuc
Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by U. J. Moore. 2001
An Introduction to Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Oxford Medical Publications) by
David A. Mitchell. 2006.
Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by James R. Hupp, Edward Ellis III, and
Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Secrets by A. Omar Abubaker DMD PhD and Kenneth J.
Benson. 2007.
Clinical Review of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by Shahrokh C. Bagheri DMD MD and
Chris Jo. 2007.
Manual of Minor Oral Surgery for the General Dentist by Karl R. Koerner. 2006.
Textbook of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery – Neelima Anil Malik- 2nd edition
a. Accommodation
 Recovery Room
 Scrub Area
c. Other resources
 Viva
department:



improvement.




committee
Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and faculty
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
OPERATIVE DENTISTRY III
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Operative Dentistry III
521 RDS
2
Dentistry
422 RDS
shawajrah
B. Objectives






Know the recent advances in glass ionomer restorations
Be able to perform class IV and class VI composite restoration
Know the various causes of hypersensitivity and how to manage the same
Be able to manage the Deep Caries Lesions
Understand the concept of minimal intervention dentistry
Know how to manage the badly broken tooth
This course is provided by the Restorative department during the first semester of the
fifth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and clinics, in which the former
The course is given as one lecture and one lab sessions per week for the whole semester
In this course the students will be trained to restore the teeth with advanced restorative
materials like resin modified glass ionomer cement, prepare cavities in fractured
anterior teeth and restore the form, function & esthetics with composite resin material,
manage hypersensitive teeth, manage Deep Caries Lesions and badly broken teeth.
Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Operative Dentistry III | Page - 239
I.
II.
Topics
No. of
credit
hours
Contact
hours
1
Recent advances in glass ionomer restorations
1
1
3
Hypersensitivity
2
2
2
Class IV & V composite cavity preparation & restoration
4
Management of Deep Carious Lesions
5
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
Clinics
Compound Amalgam restorations
modified glass ionomer restorations
Complex amalgam restorations
Modified composite restorations
Composite, Glass ionomer combined restorations
I.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
--II.
2
2
Bonded amalgam restoration
SI
NUM
1
2
2
Pin retained Amalgam Restoration
7
2
2
Minimal Invasive Operative Care
6
2
Practical
14
Others
---
III.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Utilise the
Explanation
perceived
utilising Microsoft
advantages of
power point
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
Recent advances in
glass ionomer
restoarations
Perform cavity
preparations for
composite
restorations on
patients
Control
hypersensitivity
Manage deep
carious lesions
Utilize minimal
intervention
dentistry concepts
as and when
required in patients
including pictures
Explanations by
drawing pictures
Interactions with
the students to
explain the
concepts taught to
develop self
interest and
competition among
the fellow students
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P) &
Final
examination(T/P)
Complete
supervision and
instruction on each
clinical case
Perform complex
amalgam
restorations
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
concentration,
perception and
nevertheless
memory all of
which leading to
understanding ,
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts
(both theoretical
and practical ) at
any given time.
The students are
encouraged to have
an attitude for
commitment to
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
some parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P) &
Final
examination(T/P)
The student are
always encouraged
to the best in
friendly way, and
Assesment of
clinical cases and
their completion
and follow up at a
Clinical
demonstrations ,
case presentation
and supervision
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff
members/patients,
with responsibility
towards finishing
all cases on time.
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Know the basics of
communication and
information
technology, utilise
way possible in
their assignments
ability to utilise
Use the teflon
coated instruments
to manipulate ,
finish & polish
composite
restorations.
Able to provide the
patient /build up
and provide the
treatment best way
cases are given and
completed
requirement are set
at a definite
number
The students are
guided to carry out
web based search
and encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative dentistry
in circulating the
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
members.
Clinical
demonstrations
Critical evaluation
in a constructive
manner.
Assignments on
theoretical aspects
required time
Assesment by the
staff members on
the students
behaviour / rapport
with the patients
and attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment/clinical
cases required
Evaluate their
method of
assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the same.
The students will
have continuous
assessment on the
practical work and
the students are
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
possible and
keeping the
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Mid term practical
exam
60%
Final Written Exams
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
30%
30%
H. Students support
b- Dr Abbas Rizvi
D. Learning resources
J. Swift. 2006.
4. Conservative Dentistry Including Endodontics: Questions and Answers by Bansal. 2008.
5. Pre-Clinical Conservative Dentistry by Vimal K Sikri. 2009.
E. Facilities required
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
F. Course evaluation and improvement processes
department:

improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:





Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PERIODONTICS III
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Jazan University
Dentistry
Periodontics III , 531 PDS
4
Dentistry
Dr. Ebtesam EL Zefzaf
Dr. Mohammad Sabir
Dr. Sameena Sultana
Dr. Reda Saber
432 PDS
Shwajrah
B. Objectives:










Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and apply
Be able to diagnose and make treatment plans for common periodontal conditions.
Periodontal therapy in older adults
Periodontal therapy in female patients
Periodontal surgical procedures
Periodontal flap surgical procedures
Periodontal plastic and esthetic procedures
Be able to plan specific surgical approach to certain periodontal conditions.
Understand and describe different surgical techniques used in periodontics.
Understand the role of systemic and other conditions in the etiology of periodontal
diseases.
Understand surgical follow-up and wound healing.
C. Course description:
The program in fifth year commences in-depth education in periodontics, building on
the conceptual foundations established in the fourth year programs. In fifth year the
principal objective of the full program in periodontics is to educate and prepare general
practitioners of dentistry to serve the universal public need of prevention, recognition
and comprehensive diagnosis and treatment of periodontal diseases. The program
integrates didactic, preclinical and clinical elements aiming to achieve detailed understanding of the pathogenesis, diagnosis, and approaches to therapy for the more
common types of periodontal conditions. The didactic element centres on periodontal
surgery, fundamentals of clinical decision-making, and treatment of inflammation. The
clinical element centres on the control of inflammatory periodontal conditions by
Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Periodontics III | Page - 246
concentrating on examination, patient motivation, oral hygiene, and scaling and root
planning skills. The clinical element is concerned with the application of knowledge
gained in the didactic study of Periodontics, and it is directly related to the previous
material presented in the seventh and eight semester’s clinic. In the ninth semester the
student will also be able to discuss the rationale behind surgical periodontal procedures
by assisting during surgeries. The knowledge that will be acquired in the surgical course
Periodontics III will help the student with this endeavour.
I.












Topics
No. of Weeks
2
Periodontal therapy: Older adults, Female patients
Aggressive forms of periodontal diseases
2
Introduction to Periodontal Surgery : Part I
Introduction to Periodontal Surgery: Part II
1
Periodontal Surgery: Gingival Surgical Procedures
1
Periodontal Surgery: Periodontal Flap Procedures
3
Periodontal Surgery
Osseous Resection
Reconstruction Procedures
1
Periodontal Surgery: Furcation Involvement and
Management
2
Periodontal Surgery: Periodontal Plastic and Esthetic
Procedures – part II
Periodontal plastic and esthetic procedures: part II
Total
TOPIC: PRACTICAL
 Detailed periodontal case history
 Determine diagnosis
 Prognosis of the patient
 Plan treatment
 Scaling, root planning,
 Local drug delivery
 SPT
 Re-evaluation after Root Planning
 Periodontal Recall/Prophylaxis
 Management of patients with different periodontal
diseases and conditions.
Total
Contact hours
2
2
1
1
3
1
2
12
12
13
39
13
39
Lectures
12
Tutorials
--
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate on
theoretical
several of
knowledge
important points
related to
Periodontics into associated with
assigned readings.
clinical practice.
The purposes of
the lectures are to
increase the
understanding and
to complement the
assigned readings.
The lectures are
not a replacement
of the assigned
readings and other
resources.
b. Cognitive
1-Demonstrate
1-Lectures,
ability to use self- periodontal exam
knowledge and
and clinical
decision on
practice, treatment
working with
planning on
colleagues,
student partner
patients, and
and patients.
teacher.
2-Small group
2-Develop a
activity rotation
dentist-patient
relationship with (Prophylaxis,
Communication
patients.
3-Demonstrate
with Patients and
knowledgeable
Radiology).
skill performance 3-Seminars to
insure the
in carrying out
appropriate
specific
application of
periodontal
different clinical
clinical
concepts.
procedures
4-Case study to
develop rationales
13
II.
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions (MCQs)
based on materials
from the lectures and
assigned readings
from the text book.
2-Short answer type
questions
3-True/False type
questions
examination and
treatment planning
5-Viva voce
1- Students need to
complete the assigned
clinical experiences.
2-Daily Grading
3-Clinical Practice
(core values, infection
control, record
keeping)
4-Assessment of
periodontal
assessment, diagnosis
and treatment
planning, calculus
detection and
instrumentation
technique, periodontal
re-evaluation/referral
and diagnosis and
treatment planning.
interpret patient data,
for periodontal
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment
planning.
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
1-Develop
awareness into
one’s own
attitude towards
periodontal
diseases
2-Value one’s
own mental
health practices
as a professional
general dental
practitioner.
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Use of web based
material related
to
Periodontology.
1. Hand-eye coordination (to aid
in proper
harmless and
uneventful
treatment to the
patient and also
the supporting
staff)
1-Video taping of
actual student’s
interactions in
plays) to teach
dynamics of
interaction.
2- Direct
interaction with
patients (real-life
simulation) to
apply and critique
interpersonal
skills.
Group tutorial to
& utilization of
appropriate web
based periodontic
material.
a) skillful scaling
procedures on
patients
b) improving
tactile sensation
while probing
subgingival areas
c) Probing and
handling hard and
soft tissues
d) Administer local
information and
radiographs to be able
to use these findings to
accurately assess and
treat patients.
6-Formulate a
comprehensive
diagnosis and
treatment/referral
plan for the
management of
patients.
7-Prevent asses and
manage of medical and
dental emergencies.
1-Oral semi-structure
interview (to
demonstrate the
ability of
communication with
patients)
2- Seminar (to present
project outcome as a
demonstration of
ability to apply
interviewing and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication skills
between students and
patients.
Assignments (to
present recent
different topic related
to periodontal therapy.
case/patient by the
staff
b) Assessment of work
done by grading.
2. Manual
dexterity
3.High visual
acuity
V.
anesthesia
injections with
minimal pain and
discomfort
a) Carrying out
scaling procedures
with skill and
dexterity
b) Appropriate and
effective selection
of armamentarium
for clinical
procedures
c) Ability to be
ambidextrous as
and when required
d) Develop high
levels of tactile
clinical procedures
a) Developing high
dimensions to
think and
clinical conditions
b) Ability to carry
out different
clinical procedures
using indirect
vision (mirror
images)
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
Midterm
40%
60%
 Quiz
 Viva voce
Quiz II
Practical Exams
Written Exams


Quiz
Viva voce
Proportion
10%


10%
20%
10%
10%


30%
10%
D. Students support
1. Carranza’s Clinical Periodontology: Newman, Takei, Klokkevold and Carranza, 10th
J. D. Manson. 2009.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:


Peer evaluations.
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
CLINICAL ENDODONTICS I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Faculty of Dentistry
Dentistry
Clinical Endodontics I
523 RDS
2
Dentistry
Prof. Hosham Khalifa kamaly
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
424 RDS
Shawajarah
B. Objectives






Have the knowledge of the various endodontic emergencies and their management.
Understand the various traumatic injuries along with their diagnosis, classification and
management.
Possess the knowledge of the fundamentals of the restoration of endodontically treated
teeth.
Plan endodontic surgeries and determine its prognosis.
Understand the various tooth discoloration and the techniques for vital and non-vital
bleaching.
To perform endodontic procedures on the patient’s anterior teeth in the clinics.
The course is given to 5th year (9th semester) students as one lecture and one clinical
session. The theoretical part covers topics which include endodontic emergencies and
their management, traumatic injuries, restoration of the endodontically treated teeth,
surgical endodontics and tooth discoloration and bleaching. The clinical component
allows the students to take up patients for diagnosis, treatment planning and managing
the cases requiring endodontic therapy in the maxillary and mandibular incisors and
canines. The course is given as one lecture and one clinical session per week, equivalent
to 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.
Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Clinical Endodontics I | Page - 253
S.No.
1.
2.
TOPICS
Endodontic emergencies and treatment
Traumatic Injuries
 Classification
 Etiology
 Examination
NO. OF WEEKS
CREDIT HOURS
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
 Enamel fracture
 Crown fracture
 Crown-root fracture
3.
 Root fracture
 Luxation
 Avulsion
Restoration Of Endodontically Treated
Teeth





Definition
Classification
Indication
Contraindication
Fundamentals
 Design principles
 Custom cast post and core
4.
 Core materials
 Preparation for post and core
Tooth Discoloration And Bleaching
 Tooth discoloration
 Vital bleaching
 Non-vital bleaching
5.
Endodontic Surgery
 Indications and contraindications
 General and systemic considerations
 Classification of endodontic surgical
procedures
 Principles of endodontic surgery









IV.
Surgical drainage
Flap designs
Flap reflection
Flap retraction
Periradicular curettage
Root end resection and preparation
Root end filling
Soft tissue repositioning
Suturing
CLINICALS
Orientation to the Endodontics clinic, equipments and its
accessories, and endodontic instruments.
Introduction to Endodontics clinic system, patient - dentist
relationship , patient records and filing system
Patient preparation , position, assessment and diagnosis
Access cavity preparation in Maxillary Central & Lateral
Incisors followed by pulp extirpation and thorough irrigation
followed by Working Length Determination and giving closed
dressing.
Cleaning and Shaping of the root canals with step back
technique along with copious irrigation and giving closed
dressing.
Obturation of the prepared root canal space involving
application of endodontic sealer and lateral condensation of
the gutta percha points followed by temporary restoration.
Access cavity preparation in Maxillary Canine& maxillary
first premolar followed by pulp extirpation and thorough
irrigation followed by Working Length Determination and
No. of
weeks
Contact
hours
1
3
1
3
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
giving closed dressing.
Cleaning and Shaping of the root canals with step back
technique along with copious irrigation and giving closed
dressing.
Obturation of the prepared root canal space involving
application of endodontic sealer and lateral condensation of
the gutta percha points followed by temporary restoration.
III.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14
III.
-
2
6
2
6
Internship
14
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Should be well
Explanation
versed with all the
utilising Microsoft
concepts of
power point
sterilization and
including pictures
disinfection in
Explanations by
endodontics
drawing pictures
Students should be Interactions with
able to obtain a
the students to
detailed case
explain the
history of the
concepts taught to
patient, diagnose
develop self
the disease and
interest and
plan the treatment
competition among
accordingly
the fellow students.
Should be able to
Complete
carry out isolation
supervision and
of the operatory
instruction on each
field.
clinical case
Realize and
consider the pain ,
its causes,
mechanism and its
control techniques.
Recognize and
classify the
traumatic injuries
as well as should
Others
-
r
IV.
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments which
includes
Quizzes, mcq’s &
Midterm
examination(T/P),
Clinical
Requirements
And Final
examination(T/P)
be well versed in
its management.
Well versed with
the restoration of
the endodontically
treated tooth.
Recognize and
manage the various
types of tooth
discolorations.
Recognize the
various surgical
procedures
involved in
endodontics and
plan endodontic
surgery.
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
perception and
memory all of
which leading to
understanding,
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts
(both theoretical
and practical) at
any given time.
The students are
encouraged to have
an attitude for
commitment to
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff members/
patients , with
responsibility
towards finishing
all cases on time.
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
the taught s parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Continuous
assessments which
includes
Quizzes, Mcq’s &
Midterm
examination(T/P)
And Final
examination(T/P)
The students are
always encouraged
to the best and
assignments are
given deadlines to
be submitted.
Assessment of
clinical cases and
their completion
and follow up at a
Clinical
demonstrations ,
case presentation
and supervision
Practical
requirement are set
at a definite
number.
Team work is
encouraged by
allowing the
students to make
presentations in a
Assignments on
theoretical aspects
required time
Assesment by the
staff members on
their behaviour /
rapport with the
patients and
group.
attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment
/Clinical cases
required
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Develop the ability
to do a case
presentation to the
class utilising
Microsoft
PowerPoint
Know the basics of
communication and
information
technology & utilise
way possible in
their assignments
V.
Ability to utilise
electronic library/
e-journals.
Able to provide the
patient /build up
and provide the
treatment in a best
possible way
keeping the
The students are
guided to carry out
web based search
and encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative dentistry
in circulating the
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
members.
Evaluate their
method of
collection of ebased facts &
assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the same.
Clinical
demonstrations
The students will
have continuous
assessment on the
development of
tactile sensation
while working in
the root canal and
the accuracy of
handling the rotary
instruments and the
students are
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
Critical evaluation
on the clinical work
done in a
constructive
manner.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Proportion
40%
60%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Midterm
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Oral Exams
D. Students support
5%
5%
10%
20%
20%
30%
10%
2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PEDODONTICS I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
JAZAN University
Pedodontics I , 533 PDS
2 (1+1)
BDS
DR. GUNA SEKHAR
MADIRAJU
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
433 PDS
Al-Sawajrah Campus
B. Objectives







Be able to understand normal and abnormal growth & development of teeth and
occlusion and its clinical application in defining and management of problems in
primary & mixed dentitions.
Be able to record and assess medical and dental history in children and adolescent
patients in relation to their dental treatment needs.
Be able to perform clinical examination, take/interpret radiographs and arrive at proper
diagnosis & formulate an appropriate treatment plan for various dental problems in
children.
Have knowledge of and apply different behaviour modification techniques used in
children.
Be able to apply the basic principles of four-handed dentistry, by working both as a
dentist and as a dental assistant.
Be able to perform oral prophylactic and preventive procedures in Pedodontic patients.
Have knowledge on the importance of oral health and discuss with parents and/or
children different approaches for the prevention of dental disease in children &
adolescents.
During the clinical Pedodontics the aim of teaching is to implement the knowledge
gained by the students in the Pre-clinic sessions. Clinical Pedodontics will be taught in
5th & 6th years and has been divided into 4 courses i.e., Pedodontics I, II, III, & IV, which
corresponds to 9th, 10th, 11th and 12th semesters respectively. Comprehensive care
Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Pedodontics I | Page - 261
concept will be adapted so that students develop and awareness of/and appreciation for
the child as a whole. The patients with age ranging from 3-14 years will be selected for
treatment in clinical Pedodontics.
Pedodontics-I course is taught in 5th Year/9th Semester and includes study of
examination, diagnosis & treatment planning for various dental problems in children
from infancy through adolescence; radiographs/techniques in children; developmental
anomalies of teeth and jaws; development of normal occlusion; management of child in
dental office; preventive procedures; oral hygiene in children & adolescents including
Infant oral health care; and understanding of various gingival & periodontal diseases in
children. The clinical sessions encompass extensive clinical training on recording cases,
diagnosis & treatment of common problems in Pedodontics which also includes taking
and interpreting intra-oral radiographs; behaviour modification of child patients;
performing oral prophylactic procedures and application of topical fluorides.
I.
Topics
Introduction to Clinical Pedodontics
Eruption of teeth & Teething disorders
Developmental anomalies of teeth/jaws
Development of Occlusion in children
Management of child in dental office
Radiographs/techniques in children
Oral hygiene procedures in children
Gingival/Periodontal diseases in children
Preventive procedures in children
TOTAL
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
13
1
13
Schedule of Clinical Sessions
Topics
Infection control & Dental chair Operating positions
Medical/Dental history
No. of Weeks
-
Clinical examination
-
Radiographic interpretation
-
Dental charting
Recording Case history
-
Diagnosis
-
Treatment planning
-
Behaviour management/modification techniques
-
Oral prophylactic procedures
-
Topical fluoride application
-
Perform Education & motivation on oral health care
-
TOTAL
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
III.
-
Practical/Clinics
(Credit hours)
13
13
Others
-
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Record case history & oral Lectures.
findings of patients.
Clinical
Management of child in
discussions &
dental clinic.
demonstrations
Identify & treat dental
on patients/live
problems in
models.
children/adolescents.
Clinical sessions
Mechanism of action &
under supervision
application of topical
by staff.
fluorides.
Case
Teach & motivate
presentations by
parents/children
students.
regarding proper
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Cognitive
Interpersonal skills
& Responsibilities
Communication,
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor skills
brushing techniques
according to child’s age.
Identification of teeth &
various developmental
abnormalities of teeth.
Provide proper diagnosis
& device appropriate
treatment plan for various
dental problems in
primary/mixed dentition.
Be able to evaluate the
patient’s need and select
appropriate behaviour
modification technique.
Evaluation and Selection
of Pedodontics patients
for preventive
procedures.
clinical attendance.
Demonstrate ethical
Should develop good
Should wear a neat lab
coat with name tag &
ensure proper handling of
Pedodontics patients.
Establish and maintain
accurate patient records.
Students will be taught to
regularly update their
knowledge on
Pedodontics by increased
use of internet/web based
information.
Should develop skills for
performing
radiographic/preventive
procedures.
Lectures.
Clinical
discussions &
demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case
presentations by
students.
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Clinical sessions
under regular
supervision by
staff.
Continuous
evaluation during
the course.
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
Pedodontics.
Registration of
online journals.
Audio-visual/live
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
‘Quota
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students.
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Evaluation of quota
requirements.
Practical & Oral
exams
requirements for
clinical work to
improve clinical
efficiency’
V.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
50%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
50%
D. Students support
Practical Exams
Orals/Viva-voce
Written Exams
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
20%
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
Pub Co. 1995
2000.
1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry (IJPD)
2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry (JCPD)
3. Journal of Dentistry for Children (JDC)
4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry (AAPD)
5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry (JISPPD)
Miscellaneous:
a. Accommodation
 Clinics/labs for 40-60 students
 Digital radiograph facility (RVG) with imaging software
c. Other resources
department:
 By identifying and evaluating areas which need further improvement
and work collectively to achieve it.
committee

whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
 Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune the course in line
with international standards.
10 T H SEMESTER
FIFTH YEAR
CODE
513 MDS
522 RDS
524 RDS
532 PDS
534 PDS
535 PDS
542 SDS
544 SDS
551 DMS
TOTAL
TENTH SEMESTER
TH
PR
COURSE TITLE
Advanced Oral &
Operative Dentistry IV
Clinical Endodontics II
Periodontics IV
Pedodontics II
Preclinical Orthodontics
Clinical Removable
Prosthodontics IV
Clinical Fixed
Prosthodontics II
Dental Pharmacology
9
CRH
COH
P-REQ
4
512 MDS
4
541 SDS
1
3
2
1
3
2
0
24
1
18
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
10
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
4
4
4
4
5
4
1
34
521 RDS
523 RDS
531 PDS
533 PDS
531 PDS
543 SDS
354 DMS
ADVANCED ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY I
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Advanced Oral &
513 MDS
2
Dentistry
Ashwin. J.
512 MDS
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives


The students should be able to assess patients for major surgical procedures, properly
take physical examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment
Apply knowledge to assess the patient, draw out a treatment plan and execute it by the
Help of his instructor for Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton, Mandibular
Fractures, Condylar Fractures, and Orthognathic Surgeries.
intended to cover major oral surgical procedures, trauma and orthognathic surgeries
The students should be able to assess patients for major surgical procedures, properly take
physical examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment. Apply knowledge to assess the
patient, draw out a treatment plan and execute it by the help of his instructor for Fractures of
middle third of facial skeleton, Mandibular Fractures, Condylar Fractures, and Orthognathic
Surgeries. In the clinics the student will learn to perform surgical removal of impacted teeth,
uncomplicated pre-prosthetic surgeries, biopsy of soft tissues, management of infections of
dental origin, management of impacted teeth which include flap design and suturing techniques.
Students will also be taught in detail hospital rules and protocol, which include medical
records, doctor’s orders, progress notes, laboratory and radiographical results, graphics,
operation notes and discharge summary.
Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Advanced Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery I | Page - 269
I.
Topics
1. Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton-I
No. of Weeks
1
2. Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton-II
1
3. Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton-III
1
4
4. Mandibular Fractures –I
1
4
5. Mandibular Fractures –II
1
4
6. Condylar Fractures –I
1
4
7. Condylar Fractures –II
1
4
8. Trauma Miscellaneous-I
1
4
9. Trauma Miscellaneous-II
1
4
10. Orthognathic Surgeries-I
1
4
11. Orthognathic Surgeries-II
1
4
II.
Course Component
Lectures
11
Tutorials
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching strategies
a. Knowledge
To identify
fractures of middle
third of facial
4
Internship
11
III.
Lectures.
& demonstrations on
Contact hours
4
Others
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
skeleton and learn
the management.
To identify
mandibular
fractures and learn
the management.
To identify
condylar fractures
and learn the
management
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
To identify
Orthognathic
surgeries and
learn the
management.
Identify trauma on
radiographs.
Should follow
proper protocol
for regular clinical
attendance.
Demonstrate
ethical
relationship with
staff.
Should develop
good working
relations with his
professional
colleagues.
Should wear a neat
apron/lab coat
with name tag.
Ensure proper
patients/live models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision by
staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Lectures.
& demonstrations on
Clinical sessions
staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Lectures.
& demonstrations on
Clinical sessions
staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous
evaluation during
the course
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
handling of
patients
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
knowledge on Oral
surgery by
increased use of
internet/web
based information
Should develop
skills for
identifying and
managing trauma
patients under the
supervision of staff
List of web sites
providing knowledge
on Oral Surgery.
Registration of
online journals
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students
Exclusive training on
clinical procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
A. Fonscaea Trauma Series
B. An Atlas of Minor Oral Surgery: principles and practice, D A McGowan ISBN:
1853177660
C. An Outline of Oral Surgery: parts 1 and 2, H C Killey, L W Kay G R Seward,
0723610614
D. Maxillofacial and Dental Emergencies, J E Hawkesford 0192623915
E. Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (5th edition) U J Moore 0632054387
a. Accommodation
 Recovery Room
 Scrub Area
c. Other resources
 Viva
department:



improvement.




committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
OPERATIVE DENTISTRY IV
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Operative Dentistry IV
522 RDS
2
Dentistry
521 RDS
Shawajrah
B. Objectives







Know the various advantages, disadvantages, indications and contraindications of Direct
Posterior Esthetic Restoration
Know the various causes of discoloration of vital teeth and its management
Understand the various esthetic procedures and its cllinical application
Know the various failures of operative restorations and how to counteract the same.
Know the basic principles of cavity preparation for esthetic inlays and onlays
Know the indications, contraindications, advantages & disadvantages of cast gold
restorations
Know how to classify direct filling gold, and its advantages and disadvantages
This course is provided by the Restorative department during the second semester of
the fifth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and clinics, in which the former
The course is given as one lecture and one lab sessions per week for the whole semester
In this course the students will be trained to prepare cavities and restore with posterior
composite resin material, manage discolored vital teeth, counteract or repair the failed
Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Operative Dentistry IV | Page - 275
restorations, know the differences between direct and indirect restorations, know the
basic principles of cavity preparation for cast gold and direct gold restorations, prepare
and restore class II compound & complex cavities with Amalgam restorative material on
patients.
I.
Topics
1
Direct Posterior Esthetic Restoration
3
Esthetic Considerations in Operative Dentistry
2
Conservative Treatment of Vital Discolored Teeth
4
1
Introduction to Cast Gold Restoration
8
2
Introduction to Direct gold restoration
SI
NUM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
2
Indirect Posterior Esthetic Restoration
7
2
2
Failures of composite restorations
6
Contact
hours
2
Failures of amalgam Restorations
5
No. of
credit
hours
2
1
CLINICS
Complex amalgam restorations
Bonded amalgam restorations
Management of deep carious lesions
Management of badly broken teeth
Management of hypersensitivity
Management of vital discoloured teeth
Demonstration of cast gold restorations
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
14
---
Practical
14
Others
---
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
III.
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Technique for
Explanation
composite use in
utilising Microsoft
the treatment of the power point
occlusal and
including pictures
proximal surfaces
Explanations by
of posterior teeth.
drawing pictures
Conservative
Treatment of Vital
Discolored Teeth
b. Cognitive
Interactions with
the students to
explain the
concepts taught to
Recognise the
develop self
differences between interest and
direct and indirect
competition among
posterior esthetic
the fellow students
restorations
Complete
Describe the
supervision and
advantages and
instruction on each
disadvantages of
clinical case
Cast Gold
Restoration
Describe basic
concepts of Direct
filling gold
restorationStudents will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in good
concentration,
perception and
nevertheless
memory all of
which leading to
understanding ,
recollection,
reproduction of the
taught concepts
(both theoretical
and practical ) at
Explanation
utilising Microsoft
power point
Explanatory
drawing to clarify
some parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
Clinical
demonstrations ,
case presentation
and supervision
Method of
Assessment
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P) &
Final
examination(T/P)
Continuous
assessments and
discussions which
incudes Quizzes &
Midterm
examination(T/P) &
Final
examination(T/P)
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
any given time.
The students are
encouraged to have
an attitude for
commitment to
work well with the
fellow students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff
members/patients ,
with responsibility
towards finishing
all cases on time.
Know the basics of
communication and
information
technology, utilise
way possible in
their assignments
ability to utilise
Able to provide the
patient /build up
and provide the
treatment best way
possible and
keeping the
The student are
always encouraged
to the best in
friendly way, and
cases are given and
completed
requirement are set
at a definite
number
The students are
guided to carry out
web based search
and encouraged to
collect material of
relevance
pertaining to
operative dentistry
in circulating the
electronically
collected material
with the fellow
members.
Clinical
demonstrations
Critical evaluation
in a constructive
manner..
Assesment of
clinical cases and
their completion
and follow up at a
Assignments on
theoretical aspects
required time
Assesment by the
staff members on
the students
behaviour / rapport
with the patients
and attendance
Issuing deadlines
on a given
assignment/clinical
cases required
Evaluate their
method of
assessment of the
method and
duration of time
involving the same.
The students will
have continuous
assessment on the
practical work and
the students are
expected to fulfil
the requirements
set.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Mid-term
practical
exam
Mid-term
written
exam
60%
Final Written Exams
I.
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
30%
30%
Students support
b- Dr Abbas Rizvi
D. Learning resources
J. Swift. 2006.
4. Conservative Dentistry Including Endodontics: Questions and Answers by Bansal. 2008.
5. Pre-Clinical Conservative Dentistry by Vimal K Sikri. 2009.
E. Facilities required
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
F. Course evaluation and improvement processes
department:

improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.

CLINICAL ENDODONTICS II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Clinical Endodontics II
524 RDS
2
Dentistry
Dr. Abbas Rizvi
523 RDS
Shawajarah
B. Objectives






Differentiate between odontogenic and non-odontogenic pain and diagnose it.
Have the knowledge of the effect of pulp diseases on periodontium and likewise the
effect of periodontal diseases on pulp.
Understand the use of premedication in endodontics and endodontic pharmacology.
Have the knowledge of the various types and factors responsible for different
endodontic mishaps.
Understand the causes of endodontic failures and possess the ability to plan the retreatment of the failed endodontic treatment.
Perform endodontic procedures on the patient’s premolars and mandibular 1st molar.
The course is given to 5th year (10th semester) students as one lecture and one clinical
session. The theoretical part covers topics which include non-odontogenic tooth ache,
endodontic-periodontic interrelationship, pharmacology in endodontics, endodontic
mishaps and it lays emphasis on the management of the failed endodontic procedures. .
The clinical component allows the students to take up patients for diagnosis, treatment
planning and managing the cases requiring endodontic therapy in the maxillary and
mandibular premolars and mandibular 1st molar. The course is given as one lecture and
one clinical session per week, equivalent to 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.
Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Clinical Endodontics II | Page - 282
S.No.
1.
TOPICS
NON-ODONTOGENIC TOOTH ACHE
Acute pain syndromes




NO. OF WEEKS
CREDIT HOURS
3
3
3
3
1
1
Trigeminal neuralgia
Cluster headache
Acute otitis media
Maxillary sinusitis
Acute pain syndromes contd….
 Sialolithiasis
 Cardiogenic jaw pain
Chronic pain syndromes
 Internal derangement of TMJ
Chronic pain syndromes contd..





2.
Facial myalgia
Atypical facial pain
Allergic sinusitis
Causalgia
Post herpetic neuralgia
Endodontic And Periodontic Lesions
 Effect of pulp disease on periodontium
 Effect of endodntic treatment on
periodontium
 Effect of periodontal disease on pulp
 Effect of periodontal treatment on pulp
3.
 Combined endodontic-periodontic
diseases
Pharmacology in Endodontics
4.
Endodontic Mishaps
 Access related mishaps
3
3
 Instrumentation related mishap
4.
 Obturation related mishaps
RETREATMENT
 Causes of endodontic failures
3
3
Retreatment of endodontic failures
 Case selection in retreatment
 Retreatment planning
Retreatment of endodontic failures
contd…
 Retreatment techniques
 Mechanical instrumentation
I.
CLINICALS
Application of the rubber dam for isolation of the tooth.
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
3
Cleaning and shaping of the root canal with step back
technique along with copious irrigation followed by
application of intra canal medicament and giving closed
dressing.
2
6
Obturation of the prepared root canal space involving taking
the master cone radiograph, application of sealer with
lentilo-spiral and lateral condensation of the gutta percha
points followed by temporary restoration.
2
6
Access cavity preparation for Mandibular First & Second
Molar, Pulp Extirpation, Working Length Determination
followed by irrigation and giving closed dressing.
2
6
Cleaning and shaping of the root canal with step back
technique along with copious irrigation followed by
application of intra canal medicament and giving closed
dressing.
2
6
Access cavity preparation for Maxillary First Molar, Pulp
Extirpation, Working Length Determination followed by
irrigation and giving closed dressing.
2
6
Obturation of the prepared root canal space involving taking
the master cone radiograph, application of sealer with
lentilo-spiral and lateral condensation of the gutta percha
points followed by temporary restoration.
IV.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
V.
-
2
Internship
13
6
Others
-
VI.
Skills
Description
Teaching
Method of Assessment
strategies
a. Knowledge
Differentiate
Explanation
between
utilising
which includes
odontogenic and Microsoft power Quizzes, mcq’s & Midterm
non odontogenic point including
examination(T/P),Clinical
tooth ache.
pictures
Requirements
Recognize the
Explanations by
And Final
various
drawing pictures examination(T/P)
endodontic and
Interactions with
periodontic
the students to
lesions & the
explain the
interconcepts taught
relationship
to develop self
between them & interest and
their
competition
management.
among the
Recognize the
fellow students
various
endodontic
Complete
mishaps and the supervision and
methods to
instruction on
prevent them .
each clinical case
Understand the
principles of retreatment and
perform retreatment in the
cases with failed
endodontic
treatment.
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Students will
develop good
concentration on
the topics which
will result in
good
concentration,
perception and
nevertheless
memory all of
which leading to
understanding,
recollection,
reproduction of
the taught
concepts (both
theoretical and
practical) at any
given time.
Explanation
utilising
Microsoft power
point
Explanatory
drawing to
clarify the taught
parts
Guiding students
following up the
work at regular
time intervals
which includes
Quizzes, mcq’s & Midterm
examination(T/P)
And Final
examination(T/P)
The students are
encouraged to
have an attitude
for commitment
to succeed in the
field, work well
with the fellow
students and
maintain good
relationship with
staff members/
patients , with
responsibility
towards
finishing all
cases on time.
The student are
always
encouraged to
the best and
cases are given
and completed
accordingly.
Clinical
requirement are
set at a definite
number
Assessment of clinical
cases and their
completion and follow up
at a given period of time
Develop the
ability to do a
case
presentation to
the class utilising
Microsoft
PowerPoint
The students are
guided to carry
out web based
search and
encouraged to
collect material
of relevance
pertaining to
Clinical
demonstrations
, case
presentation and
supervision
Assignments on
theoretical aspects that is
delivered at a required
time
Assesment by the staff
members on their
behaviour / rapport with
the patients and
attendance
Issuing deadlines on a
given assignment
/Clinical cases required
Evaluate their method of
collection of e-based facts
& assessment of the
method and duration of
time involving the same.
Know the basics
of
communication
and information
technology &
utilise these
skills the best
way possible in
their
assignments
operative
dentistry and
actively involve
in circulating the
electronically
collected
material with
the fellow
colleagues and
staff members.
Able to provide
the treatment
details to patient
/build up good
dentist-patient
relationship and
provide the
treatment best
way possible and
keeping the
psychological
status of patients
in mind.
Clinical
demonstrations
Ability to utilise
electronic
library/ ejournals.
Critical
evaluation on
the clinical work
done in a
constructive
manner.
The students will have
continuous assessment
on the development of
the tactile sensation of
working in the root
canals and accuracy of
handling of rotary
instruments s and the
students are expected to
fulfil the requirements
set.
VII.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Requirements
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Oral Exams
D. Students support
Proportion
5%
5%
10%
20%
20%
30%
10%
2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PERIODONTICS IV
1. Institution:
2. College:
Jazan University
Dentistry
Periodontics IV, 532 PDS
b. Credit hours
4
Dentistry
d. Name of faculty member responsible for Dr. Ebtesam EL Zefzaf
course
Dr. Mohammad Sabir
Dr. Sameena Sultana
Dr. Reda Saber
531 PDS
Shwajrah
B. Objectives














Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and apply
Recent advances in periodontal surgical technology.
Periodontal surgical procedures.
Be able to plan specific surgical approach to certain periodontal conditions.
Chemotherapeutic and Host Modulation Agents
Periodontal Medicine
Diagnosis and treatment of periodontal-endodontic lesions.
Periodontal consideration in restorative dentistry.
Occlusion and Orthodontic Therapy in Periodontics
Periodontal Maintenance and Supportive Therapy
Efficacy of periodontal therapy.
Periodontics in General Practice.
Be able to diagnose and make treatment plans for common periodontal conditions.
Understand implants used in dentistry from a periodontal perspective.
Understand surgical follow-up and wound healing.
The program in fifth year commences in-depth education in Periodontics, building on
the conceptual foundations established in the fourth year programs. In fifth year the
principal objective of the full program in Periodontics is to educate and prepare general
practitioners of dentistry to serve the universal public need of prevention, recognition
and comprehensive diagnosis and treatment of periodontal diseases. The program
integrates didactic, preclinical and clinical elements aiming to achieve detailed understanding of the pathogenesis, diagnosis, and approaches to therapy for the more
common types of periodontal conditions. The didactic element centres on recent
Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Periodontics IV | Page - 290
advances in Periodontology, periodontal medicine, dental implants esthetics and
maintenance, occlusion and maintenance and supportive therapy and fundamentals of
clinical decision-making. Special emphasis will be placed on evaluation of periodontal
treatment as well as the maintenance phase and the relationship between Periodontics
and other disciplines in dentistry. The clinical element centres on the control of
inflammatory periodontal conditions by concentrating on examination, patient
motivation, oral hygiene, and scaling and root planning skills and surgical approaches.
The main objective of this semester is to present a more detailed program on diagnosis,
rationale, and delivery of periodontal therapy for a wide range of periodontal
conditions, building on the basic knowledge and instrumentation skills learned in the
previous semesters.
I.
Topics: Lectures












Recent Advances in Periodontal Surgical Technology
Chemotherapeutic and Host Modulation Agents – Part I
Chemotherapeutic and Host Modulation Agents: Part II
Periodontal Medicine: Impact of Periodontal Infection
on Systemic Health – Part I
Periodontal Medicine: Impact of Periodontal Infection
on Systemic Health: Part II
The Periodontics - Endodontics Continuum
Occlusion and Orthodontic Therapy in Periodontics
Periodontal-Restorative interrelationships
Periodontal Maintenance and Supportive Therapy
Implant Esthetcs, Recovery and Maintenance
Results of Periodontal Therapy
Periodontics in General Practice
Total
TOPICS : Practical
 Detailed periodontal case history
 Determine diagnosis,
 Prognosis
 Plan treatment
 Scaling, root planning
 Local drug delivery
 Supportive Periodontal Therapy
 Re-evaluation after Root Planning
 Periodontal Recall/Prophylaxis
 Periodontal surgery
 Handling basic surgical armamentarium.
 Post-operative instructions
 Post-surgical care
Total
No. of
Weeks
1
2
Contact hours
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
13
39
13
39
2
1
2
2
Lectures
12
Tutorials
Internship
13
--
II.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Integrate
Each lecture will
elaborate on
theoretical
several important
knowledge related
with assigned
clinical practice.
readings. The
purposes of the
lectures are to
increase the
understanding and
to complement the
assigned readings.
a replacement of
the assigned
readings and other
resources.
b. Cognitive
1-Demonstrate
ability to use selfknowledge
and
decision
on
working
with
and teacher.
with patients.
3-Demonstrate
knowledgeable skill
performance in
carrying out
clinical procedures
1-Lectures,
periodontal exam
and clinical
practice, treatment
planning of
periodontal patient.
2-Nonsurgical and
surgical treatment
of periodontal
patients.
3-Small group
activity rotation
(Prophylaxis,
Communication
with Patients and
Radiology).
4-Seminars to
insure the
appropriate
application of
different clinical
concepts.
Method of
Assessment
1-Multiple choice
questions
(MCQ)
based on materials
from the lectures
and
assigned
readings from the
text book.
2-Short answer type
questions
3-True/False type
questions
examination
and
treatment planning
5-Viva voce
The following
criteria will be used
to assess the
students:
1-Clinical
Competency
Assessments:
(i)-Clinical
periodontal Case
presentation
Assessment
(ii)-Periodontal
Diagnosis
Assessment
(iii)-Periodontal
Scaling and root
planning
Assessment
2-Professional
Evaluation
3-Daily Grading
4- Prevent, assess
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
5-Case study to
develop rationales
for periodontal
assessments,
diagnosis, and
treatment planning.
1-Develop
1-Video taping of
awareness
into actual student’s
one’s own attitude interactions in
groups or one-totowards
one student patient
periodontal
diseases
plays) to teach
2-Value one’s own
dynamics of
mental health
interaction.
practices as a
2- Direct
professional
interaction with
general dental
patients (real-life
practitioner.
simulation) to
apply and critique
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Use of web based
material related to
Periodontology.
proper harmless
and uneventful
treatment to the
supporting staff)
2. Manual dexterity
Group tutorial to
& utilization of
appropriate web
based periodontic
material.
a) Skillful scaling
procedures on
patients
b) Improving
tactile sensation
while probing
subgingival areas
c) Probing and
handling hard and
soft tissues
d) Administer local
anesthesia
injections with
minimal pain and
discomfort
a) Carrying out
scaling procedures
with skill and
dexterity
and manage of
medical and dental
emergencies.
(to demonstrate the
ability of
communication
with patients)
2- Seminar (to
present project
outcome as a
demonstration of
ability to apply
interviewing and
interpersonal
therapeutic
communication
skills between
students and
patients.
Assignments (to
present recent
different topic
related to
periodontal
therapy.
case/patient by the
staff
b) Assessment of
work done by
grading.
VI.
b) Appropriate and
effective selection
of armamentarium
for clinical
procedures
c) Ability to be
ambidextrous as
and when required
d) Develop high
levels of tactile
clinical procedures
a) Developing high
dimensions to think
and operate in
different clinical
conditions
b) Ability to carry
out different
clinical procedures
using indirect
vision (mirror
images)
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
Midterm
40%
60%
 Quiz
 Viva voce
Quiz II
Practical Exams
Written Exams


Proportion
10%


10%
20%
10%
10%


30%
10%
Quiz
Viva voce
D. Students support
J. D. Manson. 2009.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.




committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PEDODONTICS II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Jazan University
Pedodontics II , 534 PDS
2 (1+1)
BDS
DR. GUNA SEKHAR
MADIRAJU
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
533 PDS
Al-Sawajrah Campus
B. Objectives








Have knowledge of the principles of cavity preparation & its modifications in Primary
teeth
Be able to classify and diagnose various pulpal diseases in children.
Be able to perform adequate Isolation/moisture control procedures during clinical
work.
Have knowledge of various restorative/pulp capping materials and techniques used in
primary and young permanent teeth.
Describe appropriate management for pain control in children.
Have knowledge of various local anaesthetic techniques including appropriate dosages
used in children, mechanism of action, and complications associated with the use of LA
in children.
Have knowledge on armamentarium used for extraction and should be able to perform
simple extraction procedures in Pedodontics patients.
Be able to define the role of pharmacological management including sedation and
general anaesthesia in children.
Pedodontics-II course (Clinical Pedodontics) is taught in 5th Year/10th Semester and
includes lectures on modifications of principles of cavity preparation for primary dentition;
Isolation techniques used in children; diagnosis of pulpal diseases; various pulp capping
materials and endodontic procedures in primary and young permanent teeth; Local anaesthesia
Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Pedodontics II | Page - 297
and oral surgical procedures including various cysts & tumours of jaws in children;
pharmacological management of children will also be taught.
The clinical sessions encompass extensive clinical training on performing basic restorations like
class I, class II, caries excavation and ART; Use proper isolation techniques; recording cases &
diagnosis of various pulpal diseases in primary and young permanent teeth; performing simple
extractions in children using appropriate local anaesthetic techniques; apply fissure sealants for
selected teeth.
I.
Topics
Cavity preparation & modifications in primary teeth
Isolation of teeth
No. of Weeks
1
Contact hours
1
1
1
Diagnosis of pulpal diseases in children
Endodontic treatment of primary teeth
Endodontic treatment of young permanent teeth
Local anaesthesia & Oral surgical procedures in children
Cysts/Tumours of soft tissue/bone in children
Pharmacological behaviour management (RA, GA)
TOTAL
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
13
2
13
Schedule of Clinical Sessions:
Topics
No. of Weeks
Record cases i.e., history, clinical examination, radiographs, diagnosis &
treatment planning in children
Basic/Simple restorations in children
-
Isolation of teeth (rubber dam)
-
Manipulation of dental materials
Caries excavation & ART
Administration of Local anaesthesia
Simple extractions of primary teeth
-
Application of sealants in children
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
III.
-
-
TOTAL
13
Practical/Clinics
(Credit hours)
13
Others
-
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Recording history & oral
Lectures.
findings of patients.
Clinical
Various restorative
discussions &
materials used in restoring demonstrations
vital & non-vital primary
on patients/live
and young permanent
models.
teeth.
Clinical sessions
Nerve and blood supply of
under supervision
primary/permanent teeth
by staff.
in children.
Case
Various local anaesthetic
presentations by
techniques and its dosage & students.
complications in children
Selection of teeth indicated
for sealants
Role of sedation and
general anaesthesia in
management of child.
Cognitive
Lectures.
restorative material for
Clinical
restoring primary teeth &
discussions &
young permanent teeth.
demonstrations
Diagnosis of various pulpal on patients/live
diseases in primary &
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
local anaesthetic
by staff.
technique/armamentarium Case
for extractions in children.
presentations by
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
& Responsibilities
Communication,
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor skills
Selection of Pedodontics
patients for preventive
procedures i.e., sealants.
protocol for regular clinical
attendance.
Demonstrate ethical
Should develop good
with name tag & ensure
proper handling of
Pedodontics patients.
knowledge on Pedodontics
by increased use of
internet/web based
information.
Develop skills in
application of rubber dam
during clinical procedures.
Develop skills for
administration of local
anaesthetic procedures in
children.
Perform simple
restorations & extractions
involving primary teeth
students.
Clinical sessions
under regular
supervision by
staff.
Continuous
evaluation during
the course.
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
Pedodontics.
Registration of
online journals.
Audio-visual/live
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
‘Quota
requirements for
clinical work to
improve clinical
efficiency’
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students.
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Evaluation of quota
requirements.
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
50%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
50%
Practical Exams
Orals/Viva-voce
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
D. Students support
Written Exams
20%
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
Pub Co. 1995
2000.
Miscellaneous:
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
committee
whole.
Review:
fields.
skills.

Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRECLINICAL ORTHODONTICS
1. Institution:
2. College:
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.













Credit hours
Jazan University
Dentistry
Preclinical Orthodontics,
535 PDS
3
Dentistry
Dr Roby .P. Cherian
431 PDS
Al-Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives
Understand the significance of the major concepts of facial growth and development.
Have a sound knowledge of normal and abnormal growth and development of dentoskeletal facial structures including conditions that interfere with the patient's ability to
function.
Be able to understand the different dimensional changes in arch length and width
during the transition from primary to mixed and onto the permanent dentition.
Be able to evaluate the eruption pattern as it relates to chronologic and skeletal age.
Have knowledge of normal occlusion and the use of indices for orthodontic treatment
needs.
Have knowledge of classification of malocclusion and be able to understand the etiology
of orthodontic problems.
Be able to understand the significance of oral and extra-oral habits as possible etiologic
factors in the development of malocclusion.
Have a thorough understanding of the principles of orthodontic assessment, the
different aids used in the diagnostic process and the development of a problem list.
Have knowledge about the biology of tooth movement and full understanding of the
applied forces to the teeth. Also be able to identify problems during orthodontic
treatment to ensure healthy bone, gingival and periodontal ligament.
Be able to understand the basic mechanics of tooth movement and its relevance to
clinical application.
Be well versed with the biomechanical methods adopted in orthodontic
mechanotherapy.
Have full understanding about removable appliances and the difference between a
simple removable appliance and a functional appliance.
Have basic understanding of fixed appliance mechanics that includes the use of different
bracket systems, bands and intraoral use of elastics.
Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Preclinical Orthodontics | Page - 304

Develop wire bending skills and be able to design and construct simple removable
appliances.
Knowledge of the basics of orthodontics is essential for the dental student. This course will
provide the undergraduate student the background of growth and development of dento-facial
structures, characteristics of normal occlusion, etiology, classification and diagnosis of
malocclusion as well as orthodontic appliances and their biomechanics. The student is also
trained to fabricate simple removable appliances. The course is of one semester consisting of:

Lecture (Two hours)

Practical session (Three hours)
I.
S.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
Topics
Lectures
Introduction to Orthodontics
Concepts of Growth and Development
Early Stages of Development
Late Stages of development
Development of Dentition
Functional Development of Stomatognathic system
Normal Occlusion
Epidemiology of Malocclusion
Classification of Malocclusion
Etiology of Malocclusion
Orthodontic Diagnosis
Model Analysis
Cephalometric Landmarks
Cephalometric Analysis
Biology of Tooth Movement
Mechanical Principles in Orthodontic Force
Removable Appliances
Functional Appliances
Extra-oral Orthopaedic Appliances
Fixed Appliances
Practicals
Wire bending exercises
Hawley Retainer - maxillary and mandibular
a) C-clasps
b) Labial bows
c) Acrylization
Removable appliance with Z-spring & finger spring
a) Adams clasps
b) Z-spring and Finger spring
c) Boxing and Acrylization
Removable appliance for canine retraction
No. of Weeks
Contact hours
½
1
½
½
½
1
2
1
1
1
½
1½
1
½
½
½
1
1
1½
½
½
½
1
3
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
½
4
3
1
12
9
3
9
3
9
a) Jacksons clasps
b) Helical and palatal canine retractors
c) Boxing and Acrylization
d) Lab Prescription writing
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
26
III.
IV.
Internship
39
Others
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
•Aims / scope of Orthodontics
Lectures
•Growth & development of face
& teeth
Discussions with
•Development of occlusion &
students
function
•Etiology & Classification of
Demonstrations,
Malocclusion
audio-visual aids
•Orthodontic evaluation &
& study models
examination
•Diagnostic aids used in
Orthodontics
•Biomechanics of tooth
movement
•Adverse effects of orthodontic
treatment
•Materials used in Orthodontics
•Types, principles, indications &
components of orthodontic
appliances
b. Cognitive
•Recognition & Differences
Lectures
between normal occlusion in
primary, mixed and permanent
Discussions with
dentition.
students
•Development of a problem list
according to a certain given
Demonstrations,
data base.
audio-visual aids
•Identification of basic elements & study models
of removable orthodontic
appliances.
Pre-clinical
•Selection of appropriate design practical
for commonly used removable
sessions under
appliances.
regular
Method of
Assessment
2 MCQ quiz
exams
Mid-term
MCQ exam
Final theory
exam
Oral exam
Continuous
evaluation
during the
course.
2 MCQ quiz
exams
Mid-term
MCQ &
practical
exam
Final theory
& practical
exam
Spotters
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
e. Psychomotor
skills
•Should follow proper protocol
for regular attendance.
•Demonstrate ethical
•Should develop good working
relations with his professional
colleagues.
•Should wear a neat lab coat
with name tag.
•Ensure proper handling of
•Enhance good staff-student
communication.
•Use of library & web based
information to improve
knowledge.
•Develop wire bending skills.
•Fabrication of simple
removable appliances.
supervision by
staff
Pre-clinical
practical
sessions under
regular
supervision by
staff
Oral exam
Continuous
evaluation
during the
course.
Interactive
sessions with
students.
Registration of
online journals.
Pre-clinical
practical
sessions under
regular
supervision by
staff
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm (MCQ &
Practical)
Continuous evaluation
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Step-by-step
evaluation of
each
procedure by
concerned
staff
Mid-term &
Final
practical
exams
V.
Proportion
10%
10%
15%
5%
20%
40%
D. Students support
Essential books:
1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics. 4 ed. St. Louis: Mosby;
2006.
2. Graber TM. Orthodontics: Current Principles and Practice. Philadelphia: Saunders; 2000.
3. Adams CP. The Design, Construction and use of Removable Orthodontic Appliances. 3rd
ed. Bristol: John Wright; 1964.
Recommended books:
1. An Introduction to Orthodontics, Third Edition by Laura Mitchell. 2002, Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
2. Textbook of Orthodontics, First Edition by Samir E. Bishara. 2001, Philadelphia:
Saunders.
3. Orthodontics: The Art and Science, First Edition by S.I. Bhalajhi. 1997, New Delhi: Arya
(Medi) Publishing House.
4. Principles and Practice of Orthodontics, Second Edition by JRE Mills. 1987, Churchill
Livingstone Dental Series.
Reference books:
1. Handbook of Orthodontics, Fourth Edition by Moyer and Robert E. 1988, Year Book
Medical Publisher.
2. Orthodontics for Dental Students by T.C. White and J.H. Gardiner.
3. Dental Biomechanics by Arturo N. Natali. 2003.
4. Orthodontic Materials: Scientific and Clinical Aspects by W.A. Brantley and T. Eliades.
2000.
5. Orthodontics at a Glance by Daljit S. Gill. 2008.
6. Essentials of Orthodontia by Van Broadus Dalton. 2008.
Additional learning resources:
Journals:
1. Jefferson Y. Orthodontic diagnosis in young children: beyond dental malocclusion.
General Dentistry. 2003;51(2):104-11.
2. Harris EF. Root resorption during orthodontic therapy. Seminars in Orthodontics.
2000;6(3):183-94.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:

improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.

Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
11 T H SEMESTER
SIXTH YEAR
CODE
611 MDS
631 PDS
633 PDS
635 PDS
641 SDS
643 SDS
661 DEN
663 DEN
TOTAL
ELEVENTH SEMESTER
TH
PR
COURSE TITLE
Advanced Oral &
Evidence Based Dentistry
& Research Methodology
Pedodontics III
Clinical Orthodontics I
Advanced Prosthodontics I
Dental Implantology I
Comprehensive Care
Clinics I
Practice Management &
Professional Conduct
8
CRH
COH
P-REQ
4
513 MDS
4
4
4
1
534 PDS
535 PDS
544 SDS
513 MDS
1
261 DEN
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
0
2
2
2
1
0
1
0
1
1
15
6
8
27
17
1
1
1
16
35
332 PDS
522 RDS
ADVANCED ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Dentistry
Advanced Oral &
611 MDS
2
Dentistry
Ashwin. J.
513 MDS
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives









Do patient assessment and examination of the surgical problems and come up with an
appropriate overall treatment plan.
Be able to understand when a referral to a specialist is essential.
Competent in physical evaluation and understand the clinical and lab findings, discuss
findings, diagnosis, and treatment plan options and obtain informed consent to carry the
treatment.
Manage patients' pain and anxiety through the use of local anaesthesia and other
procedures.
Manage uncomplicated extraction of single or multi-rooted, non-impacted teeth, root
pieces, pre-prosthetic surgery and other soft tissue infection of Dental origin.
Assess and manage impacted teeth under a close supervision. The students should be able
to assess patients for major surgical procedures, properly take physical examinations,
advice investigations and plan treatment.
Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for
Salivary gland disorders.
Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for Orofacial clefts.
Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for oroantral fistulas.
Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Advanced Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery II | Page - 312

Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for oral
malignancies and reconstruction of head and neck.
intended to cover major and minor oral surgical procedures in Salivary gland disorders,
Oro-facial clefts, Maxillary Sinus and its implications, oral malignancies and neck
Reconstruction of head and neck. Students will also be taught in detail hospital rules
and protocol, which include medical records, doctor’s orders, progress notes, laboratory
and radiographical results, graphics, operation notes and discharge summary.
I.
Topics
1. Salivary gland disorders-I
2. Salivary gland disorders-II
4. Oro-facial clefts-II
1
4
1
5. Maxillary Sinus and its implications-I
6. Maxillary Sinus and its implications-II
7. Cancer of Head and neck –I
8. Cancer of Head and neck – II
1
1
1
1
9. Cancer of Head and neck –III
1
10. Reconstruction of head and neck-I
1
11. Reconstruction of head and neck-I
11
Contact hours
4
1
3. Oro-facial clefts-I
II.
Course Component
Lectures
No. of Weeks
1
1
Tutorials
Internship
11
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Others
III.
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Identify
salivary Lectures.
gland
disorders, Clinical discussions
Oro-facial
clefts, & demonstrations
Cancer of Head and on patients/live
neck.
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
b. Cognitive
Identify
salivary
gland
disorders,
Oro-facial
clefts,
Cancer of Head and
neck.
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Should follow
proper protocol for
regular clinical
attendance.
Demonstrate
with staff.
Should develop
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous
evaluation during
the course
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
good working
relations with his
professional
colleagues.
Should wear a neat
apron/lab coat with
name tag.
Ensure proper
handling of
patients
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
knowledge on Oral
surgery by
increased use of
internet/web based
information
Should
develop
skills for identifying
salivary
gland
disorders,
Orofacial clefts, Cancer
of Head and neck.
patients
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on Oral
Surgery.
Registration of
online journals
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
Benson. 2007.
Chris Jo. 2007.
a. Accommodation
 Recovery Room
 Scrub Area
c. Other resources
 Viva
department:

improvement.


committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
EVIDENCE-BASED DENTISTRY & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
d. Name(s) of the faculty member(s) responsible for the
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Jazan University
Evidence-Based Dentistry &
Research Methodology,
631 PDS
1
Dentistry
Dr Kaushik Sengupta
Dr Aadil Inamdar
Dr Santosh Kumar
Tadakamandla
6th Year/11th Semester
332 PDS
–
Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives









Discuss the basic components, merits, and demerits of the various design strategies used in
biomedical research
Analyze research designs of articles published in the dental literature
Explain the principles of evidence-based dentistry and their use in clinical decision making
Frame precise, structured, and meaningful clinical questions, and locate and apply the best
available evidence to answer such questions
Apply causal reasoning to interpret epidemiologic and other scientific evidence
Interpret and use syntheses of epidemiological evidence carried out for purposes of making
clinical decisions and developing clinical practice guidelines
Identify the components of a manuscript for publication and the different types of abstracts
reporting original research
Describe the uniform requirements for manuscripts submitted for publication in the peer
reviewed literature as outlined by the INTERNATIONAL COMMITTEE of Medical Journal
Editors
Identify the standardized research reporting CHECKLISTS for specific epidemiological
methods and designs, especially those for reporting randomized controlled trials
Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Evidence-Based Dentistry & Research Methodology |
Page - 318
Evidence-based dentistry is based on the method of evidence-based health care, which can
be explained as the "conscientious, explicit, and judicious use of the best available evidence
in making optimal clinical decisions that meet individual patient needs." The EvidenceBased Dentistry and Research Methodology course is one of the most recently introduced
courses in the dental curriculum. It addresses the principles of observational and
experimental clinical epidemiological research as well as health economic and decision
analytic modelling studies. It emphasizes the qualitative issues in the conception, design,
conduct, and analysis of different research modalities used in clinical epidemiology. The
sources, assessment, and control of error, confounding, and bias for different research
designs are discussed. Students gain an understanding of systematic reviews and metaanalysis, the criteria for evidence classification, and the use of scientific evidence in
developing clinical practice guidelines and health and regulatory policies. The course helps
develop the basic skills necessary to interpret scientific literature. It helps prepare students
to structure and pose a clinical question, search for the best available evidence, critically
appraise the information obtained, and apply relevant information to patient care. It also
elaborates on the options to be taken when the evidence is equivocal and/or controversial.
Teaching strategies include interactive discussion sessions, case presentations, and
problem-based learning exercises.
I.
Topics
Introduction to research methodology
 Correlational studies
 Case report and case series
 Surveys (cross-sectional, repeated cross-sectional,
longitudinal)
 Case-control studies
 Cohort studies
 Quasi experimental studies
 Randomized controlled clinical trials
– Protocol and case report form development
 Systematic reviews and meta-analyses
 Clinical decision analysis
 Economic evaluation and health technology
assessment
 Clinical practice guidelines
 Qualitative research
 Introduction to scientific writing
Introduction to evidence-based medicine and dentistry
No. of weeks
8
Contact hours
8
3
3
Page - 319
 The philosophy of evidence-based medicine
 Definition and introduction to evidence-based
dentistry
 Levels of evidence
 Acquiring the evidence: how to find the current best
evidence?
– Evidence-based healthcare resources on the Web
– Using the Medline database
– Navigating through the Cochrane library
 Critical appraisal of the dental literature
– Assessing articles on the efficacy of treatments
 Knowledge translation: getting evidence into practice
Problem-based learning exercises
II.
Course component
Lectures
11
Tutorials
2
2
2
–
Others
–
IV. Development of learning outcomes in different domains of learning
Skills
Description
Teaching strategies
a. Knowledge
 Comprehensive
understanding and
knowledge of
evidence-based
dentistry and
epidemiological
research methods
the integration of
the principles of
evidence-based
dentistry with
different dental
specialties
areas of current
research and
development
 Provision of
extensive learning
notes and
materials to
students
 Seminars
 Guided reading
Method of
assessment
 Examinations
 Continuous takehome assignments
 Quizzes
Page - 320
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal
skills and
responsibilities
d. Communication,
information
technology, and
numerical skills
the scientific
publication process
concepts and
principles of
evidence-based
dentistry,
epidemiological
research, and
scientific writing in
different specialty
areas within
dentistry
 Taking
responsibilities
 Communicating
effectively with
patients and
colleagues
 Continuous
professional
development
 Practical
implementation of
evidence-based
dentistry
 Identification of the
best available
evidence for
answering clinical
questions in
dentistry
 Appropriate
computer skills for
undertaking
literature searches
and for preparing
scientific documents
 Effective
communication
(both written and
oral)
students
 Seminars from
students
 Written
assignments from
students
report
report
materials
 Problem-based
learning exercises
 Seminar
presentations
 Group projects
 Continuous
assessment
 Written
examinations
 Evaluation of
seminar
presentation
 Student-led
teaching materials
 Use of software
such as EndNote
Power Point and
other presentation
platforms and
methods
and
communication
technology
 Continuous
assessment
 Assessment of
software
proficiency
 Written
examinations
Page - 321
e. Psychomotor
skills
technology in
academics and
research
–
–
V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
40%
Quiz II
60%
Final written exam
D.
–
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
Student support
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Books
Evidence-Based Medicine: How to Practice and Teach it (fourth edition) by Sharon E.
Straus, Paul Glasziou, W. Scott Richardson, and R. Brian Haynes. Churchill Livingstone,
2010.
How to Read a Paper: The Basics of Evidence-Based Medicine (fourth edition) by Trisha
Greenhalgh. BMJ Books, 2010.
Knowledge Translation in Health Care: Moving from Evidence to Practice by Sharon Straus,
Jacqueline Tetroe, and Ian D. Graham. Wiley-Blackwell, 2009.
Evidence-Based Practice Workbook (second edition) by Paul P. Glasziou, Chris Del Mar, and
Janet Salisbury. BMJ Books, 2007.
Evidence-Based Medicine: A Framework for Clinical Practice by Daniel J. Friedland. Prentice
Hall Health, 2011.
The Philosophy of Evidence-Based Medicine by Jeremy H. Howick. Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.
Evidence-Based Medicine Toolkit (second edition) by Carl Heneghan and Douglas
Badenoch. BMJ Books, 2006.
Evidence-Based Dentistry: An Introduction by Allan Hackshaw, Elizabeth Paul, and
Elizabeth Davenport. Wiley-Blackwell, 2006.
Evidence-Based Dentistry for Effective Practice by Jan Clarkson, Jayne E. Harrison, Amid
Ismail, Ian Needleman, and Helen V. Worthington. Taylor & Francis, 2002.
Page - 322
10. Clinical Epidemiology: The Essentials (fourth edition) by Robert H. Fletcher and Suzanne W.
Fletcher. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.
11. Clinical Epidemiology: How to Do Clinical Practice Research (third edition) by R. Brian
Haynes, David L. Sackett, Gordon H. Guyatt, and Peter Tugwell. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2005.
12. Epidemiology in Medicine by Charles H. Hennekens and Julie E. Buring. Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins, 1987.
13. Clinical Research in Oral Health by William V. Giannobile, Brian A. Burt, and Robert J. Genco.
Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.
14. Scientific Writing: Easy When You Know How by Jennifer Peat, Elizabeth Elliott, Louise
Baur, and Victoria Keena. BMJ Books, 2002.
Journal articles
Healey D, Lyons K. Evidence-based practice in dentistry. New Zealand Dental Journal.
2002;98:32–35.
2. Sutherland SE. Evidence-based dentistry: Part I. Getting started. Journal of the Canadian
Dental Association. 2001;67:204–206.
3. Sutherland S. Evidence-based dentistry: Part II. Searching for answers to clinical questions:
How to use Medline. Journal of the Canadian Dental Association. 2001;67:277–280.
4. Sutherland SE, Walker S. Evidence-based dentistry: Part III. Searching for answers to
clinical questions: finding evidence on the internet. Journal of the Canadian Dental
Association. 2001;67:320–323.
5. Sutherland S. Evidence-based dentistry: Part IV. Research design and levels of evidence.
Journal of the Canadian Dental Association. 2001;67(7):375–378.
6. Oxman AD, Sackett DL, and Guyatt GH. Users' guides to the medical literature. I. How to get
started. The Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical
Association. 1993;270:2093–2095.
7. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Cook DJ. Users' guides to the medical literature. II. How to use an
article about therapy or prevention. A. Are the results of the study valid? Evidence-Based
Medicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical Association. 1993;270:2598–
2601.
8. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Cook DJ. Users' guides to the medical literature. II. How to use an
article about therapy or prevention. B. What were the results and will they help me in
caring for my patients? Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group. Journal of the American
Medical Association. 1994;271:59–63.
9. Dans AL, Dans LF, Guyatt GH, Richardson S. Users' guides to the medical literature: XIV.
How to decide on the applicability of clinical trial results to your patient. Evidence-Based
Medicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical Association. 1998;279:545–549.
10. Guyatt GH, Sinclair J, Cook DJ, Glasziou P. Users' guides to the medical literature: XVI. How
to use a treatment recommendation. Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group and the
Cochrane Applicability Methods Working Group. Journal of the American Medical
Association. 1999;281:1836–1843.
11. Hunt DL, Jaeschke R, McKibbon KA. Users' guides to the medical literature: XXI. Using
electronic health information resources in evidence-based practice. Evidence-Based
1.
Page - 323
1879.
12. Richardson WS, Wilson MC, Williams JW Jr, Moyer VA, Naylor CD. Users' guides to the
medical literature: XXIV. How to use an article on the clinical manifestations of disease.
Journal of the American Medical Association. 2000;284:869–875.
13. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Sinclair JC, Hayward R, Cook DJ, Cook RJ. Users' guides to the medical
literature. IX. A method for grading health care recommendations. Evidence-Based
1804.
14. Egger M, Smith GD, Phillips AN. Meta-analysis: principles and procedures. British Medical
Journal. 1997;315:1533–1537.
a. Accommodation
 Software: Microsoft Office and EndNote
c. Other resources
H. Course evaluation and improvement processes
department
assessments
teaching
Page - 324
Committee
Review
Planning
requirements
Page - 325
PEDODONTICS III
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
d. Name of faculty member responsible for course
e.
f.
g.
h.
JAZAN University
Pedodontics III , 633 PDS
2 (1+1)
Dentistry
DR. GUNA SEKHAR
MADIRAJU
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
534 PDS
Al-Sawajrah Campus
B. Objectives






Have knowledge of the various preventive and interceptive procedures in primary and
mixed dentition.
List various endodontic/pulp capping materials and techniques used in primary and
Have knowledge of different types of oral habits in children including their etiology,
sequelae & management.
Demonstrate an understanding of minor orthodontic problems encountered in primary
& mixed dentition including their etiology, sequelae and management.
Be able to demonstrate classification, indications, contraindications, advantages and
disadvantages of various space maintainers used in children.
Have knowledge on the role of diet/nutrition in oral health; importance of diet
counselling and perform the same involving both the parents and children.
Pedodontics-III course (Clinical Pedodontics) is taught in 6th Year/11th Semester and
includes lectures on preventive and interceptive procedures in primary and mixed dentition;
etiology, sequelae and management of oral habits in children; minor orthodontic problems
encountered in primary & mixed dentition including their etiology, sequelae and management;
classification, indications, contraindications, advantages and disadvantages of various space
maintainers used in children; genetics in Pedodontics & Role of Diet/Nutrition in child’s oral
health and importance of diet counselling. The clinical sessions encompass extensive clinical
training on performing simple extractions in children using appropriate local anaesthetic
Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Pedodontics III | Page - 326
techniques; restoration of vital and non-vital primary & young permanent teeth; fabrication of
removable space maintainers and habit breaking appliances in selected children.
I.
Topics
No. of Weeks
Contact hours
Preventive Orthodontics
2
2
Oral habits in children
3
3
Interceptive Orthodontics
2
Minor orthodontic problems in children
2
1
Space maintenance in Pedodontics
1
3
Nutrition & Genetics in Pedodontics
3
2
2
13
13
Schedule for clinical sessions:
II.
Topics
No. of Weeks
Record cases i.e., history, clinical examination, radiographs, diagnosis &
treatment planning in children
Administration of Local anaesthetic techniques (...continued)
-
Basic endodontic procedures in primary teeth (Pulp capping,
pulpotomy)
-
Simple extractions of primary teeth (...continued)
Removable space maintainers in Pedodontic patients
Habit breaking appliances
III.
-
-
TOTAL
13
Course Component
Lectures
13
Tutorials
-
Practical/Clinics (Credit hours)
13
Others
-
IV.
V.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Various preventive and
Lectures.
interceptive orthodontic
procedures in children.
& demonstrations
Etiology, sequelae and
on patients/live
management of oral habits models.
and minor orthodontic
Clinical sessions
problems seen in children. under supervision
Factors to be considered in by staff.
the selection of space
Case presentations
maintainers in children.
by students.
Relation between diet &
dental caries in children.
Cognitive
Lectures.
restorative material for
restoring vital and non& demonstrations
vital primary & young
on patients/live
permanent teeth.
models.
Clinical sessions
local anaesthetic
under supervision
technique/armamentarium by staff.
for extractions in children. Case presentations
Understand the etiology
by students.
and management of oral
habits, space deficiency &
minor orthodontic
problems in children.
Clinical sessions
& Responsibilities
protocol for regular clinical under regular
attendance.
supervision by
Demonstrate ethical
staff.
Should develop good
with name tag & ensure
proper handling of
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous
evaluation during
the course.
Communication,
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor skills
Pedodontic patients.
knowledge on Pedodontics
by increased use of
internet/web based
information.
Develop skills for
understanding the etiology
and management of
deleterious oral habits and
minor orthodontic
problems encountered in
children.
Fabrication of removable
space maintainers.
Fabrication of removable
appliances for correcting
oral habits & minor
orthodontic problems in
children.
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
Pedodontics.
Registration of
online journals.
Audio-visual/live
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
‘Quota
requirements for
clinical work to
improve clinical
efficiency’
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students.
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Evaluation of quota
requirements.
Practical & Oral
exams
VI.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
50%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
50%
Practical Exams
Orals/Viva-voce
Written Exams
D. Students support
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
20%
Pub Co. 1995
2000.
Miscellaneous:
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
H. Course evaluation and improvement processes
department:
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
CLINICAL ORTHODONTICS I
1. Institution:
2. College:
1. Course title and code
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Credit hours
Jazan University
Dentistry
Clinical Orthodontics I, 635
PDS
2
Dentistry
Dr Roby .P. Cherian
535 PDS
Al-Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives













Have a thorough understanding of treatment planning of orthodontic problems.
Be able to recognize esthetic deficiencies and dental development problems and
understand their relationship to the overall management of the orthodontic patient.
He/she should be able to recognize the importance of coordinating treatment timing as
it coincides with facial and somatic growth.
Be able to recognize those complex problems that are beyond the ability of the general
practitioner to treat and must know when to refer to a competent and qualified
orthodontist specialist.
Have sufficient knowledge to be able to communicate with the orthodontic specialist
and understand the nature of the treatment being rendered.
Be familiar with the different methods of space gaining in orthodontics including
expansion and therapeutic extractions.
Have a full understanding of guidance of eruption through serial extraction and space
maintenance.
Know the different kinds of space maintainers, when to use them and why.
Recommend early and comprehensive orthodontic management that should be carried
out at the correct time.
Be able to identify a malocclusion and describe the major characteristics of a skeletal,
dental or combined malocclusion.
Have an understanding of the management of different types of malocclusion.
Understand the factors leading to relapse of treated malocclusion and the role of
retainers in preventing it.
Be able to trace and evaluate a cephalometric radiograph by performing a complete
Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Clinical Orthodontics I | Page - 332



cephalometric analysis.
Be able to perform and evaluate space analysis for the mixed and permanent dentition
as part of diagnostic procedures during treatment planning.
Be able to recognize and utilize the different types of removable and functional
appliances.
Be able to identify a skeletal discrepancy malocclusion that will require growth
modification therapy, thus should have basic information about headgear, facemask and
functional appliances.
This course prepares the students for the clinical session scheduled next semester. Students
learn to identify, classify, describe and differentiate occlusal problems in children and adults.
Preventive, interceptive and corrective procedures are taught, as well as recognition of severe
problems which require patients to be referred to an orthodontist. In addition, the course will
expose the students to the various orthodontic records and it will prepare the students to
analyze them and interpret the findings to arrive at a diagnosis. The course also allows the
students to recognize the various orthodontic appliances and be familiar with their applications.
The course consists of:

Lecture (One hour)

Clinical session (Three hours)
I.
S.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Topics
Lectures
Orthodontic Treatment Planning
Space Gaining in Orthodontics
Treatment in Pre-adolescent children
Management of Class I malocclusion
Management of Class II div.1 malocclusion
Management of Class II div.2 malocclusion
Management of Class III malocclusion
Retention
Clinicals
Study Model
a) Impression and pouring
b) Model trimming and finishing
Classification of Malocclusion (models)
Radiographs (OPG, Occlusal)
Hand-wrist radiograph
Cephalometric Tracing
Cephalometric Analysis
Model Analysis
a) Permanent dentition
b) Mixed dentition
No. of Weeks
Contact hours
3
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
3
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
6
6
2
6
8
9
10
Removable appliances Demonstration
Functional and Extra-oral appliances Demonstration
Soldering and Welding
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
13
III.
1
1
1
Internship
39
3
3
3
Others
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
•Different treatment
Lectures
modalities in primary, mixed
and permanent dentition
Discussions with
(Preventive, Interceptive,
students
Corrective)
•Differences between
Demonstrations,
moderate & severe problems
audio-visual aids
•Methods of gaining space in
& study models
Orthodontics
•Features, Etiology &
Clinical
Management of the different
discussions &
types of malocclusions
demonstrations
•Causes of relapse & Different on patients/live
types of retainers
models.
b. Cognitive
•Recognition of different
Lectures
classes of malocclusion
•Analysis & interpretation of
Demonstrations,
cephalometric tracings &
audio-visual aids
models
& study models
•Interpretation of other
orthodontic records
Clinical
•Diagnosis of malocclusion
discussions &
using diagnostic records
demonstrations
•Identification of types &
on patients/live
components of different
models.
orthodontic appliances
•Treatment planning in preClinical sessions
adolescents, adolescents &
under
adults
supervision by
•Treatment planning for
staff.
Method of
Assessment
2 MCQ quiz
exams
Mid-term
MCQ exam
Final theory
exam
Oral exam
Continuous
evaluation
by staff.
2 MCQ quiz
exams
Mid-term
MCQ &
clinical exam
Final theory
& clinical
exam
Spotters
Oral exam
Continuous
moderate & severe problems
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
•Should follow proper
attendance.
•Should develop good
with name tag.
•Students will be taught to
knowledge on Orthodontics
by increased use of
internet/web based
information.
•Develop skills for lab
procedures
•Undertake a cephalometric
tracing & landmark
identification
•Undertake cephalometric &
model measurements
Clinical sessions
under
supervision by
staff.
clinical
evaluation
by staff.
Continuous
evaluation
during the
course.
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
Orthodontics.
Continuous
monitoring
by the staff.
Demonstrations
& workshops of
different clinical
techniques
Step-by-step
evaluation of
each
procedure
by
concerned
staff
Clinical sessions
under
supervision by
staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm (MCQ &
Clinical)
Continuous
evaluation
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Mid-term &
Final clinical
exams
V.
Proportion
10%
10%
15%
5%
20%
40%
D. Students support
Essential books:
2006.
3. Mitchell L. An Introduction to Orthodontics. 3rd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press;
2002.
Recommended books:
1. Proffit WR, White RP, Sarver DM. Contemporary Treatment of Dentofacial Deformity.
2002.
2. Nanda R, Kapila S. Current Therapy in Orthodontics. 2009.
3. Bhalajhi SI. Orthodontics: The Art and Science. 1st ed. New Delhi: Arya (Medi)
Publishing House; 1997.
Reference books:
1. English JD, Peltomaki T, Pham-Litschel K. Mosby's Orthodontic Review. 2008.
2. Clark WB, Preston B, Cope J, Darendeliler A. Orthodontic and Dentofacial Orthopaedic
Treatment. 2009.
Journals:
1. Ngan P, Fields H. Orthodontic diagnosis and treatment planning in the primary
dentition. ASDC Journal of Dentistry for Children. 1995;62(1):25-33.
2. Ngan P, Alkire RG, Fields H. Management of space problems in the primary and mixed
dentitions. Journal of American Dental Association. 1999;130(9):1330-9.
3. Evans CA. Anteroposterior skeletal change: growth modification. Seminars in
Orthodontics. 2000;6(1):21-32.
4. Proffit WR. The timing of early treatment: an overview. American Journal of
Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 2006;129(4 Suppl 1):S47-9.
Websites:
1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics e-edition: Text with
Continually Updated Online Reference. 2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.

Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
1. Institution:
2. College:
COMPREHENSIVE CARE CLINICS I
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Credit hours
Jazan University
Comprehensive Care Clinics
I, 661 DEN
6
Dentistry
522 RDS
- Shawajra campus
B. Objectives
 Thoroughly diagnose conditions of the oral cavity and its related structures, using
proper diagnostic tools.
 Build a comprehensive treatment plan for the prevention and treatment of oral
condition.
 Provide treatment to each patient so that the oral health is restored to a healthy and
functional state.
 Perform proficiently preventive and therapeutic procedures that are used by practising
dentists in the treatment of patients.
Students at the final year (sixth) are introduced to the multidisciplinary clinical program
after they have finished all the basic laboratory and clinical courses in dentistry. The
clinical Comprehensive Care Clinics (CCC) introduces the student to multidisciplinary
treatment planning and the concept of appropriately phased patient care. Students
participate in the evaluation, planning and management of the comprehensive
treatment needs for their assigned adult patients. The concept of such a comprehensive
program, as the name suggests, is the total patient care experience from initial patient
presentation to treatment completion, and is thus implemented and emphasised in this
course. Comprehensive Care Clinics educate students in the assessment, diagnosis and
sequencing of patient care through comprehensive treatment planning sessions
designed to ensure case understanding, rational treatment decisions and an appropriate
treatment plan. This course is designed to increase the student’s skills in all
disciplines. Patient care is carried out under the supervision and teaching of clinical
instructors and staff members from each discipline are responsible for articulating the
treatment philosophies of their various specialties and coordinating these philosophies
with the concept of comprehensive dentistry.
I.
Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Comprehensive Care Clinics I | Page - 339
Topics
Introduction to the course
Comprehensive examination process including muscle
examination and TMJ analysis
Diagnosis and treatment planning
Referrals and consultation process
Clinical photography
Operative lecture
Endodontic lecture
Periodontics lecture
Prosthodontics lecture
Oral surgery lecture
Oral Medicine lecture
Orthodontics lecture
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
No. of Weeks
1
1
Contact hours
16
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
Internship
III.
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Cognitive
Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor skills
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
V.
Others
Assessment
Proportion
Task
60%
Procedure Points
Procedure Evaluation
Instructor’s Evaluation
Midterm
40%
Case presentation
Viva Voce
Final Theory Exam
Method of
Assessment
Proportion
15%
25%
10%
10%
20%
10%
10%
D. Students support
1. Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning: Principles, Design, Implementation by Michael
Cohen. 2008.
2. Essential Dental Handbook: Clinical and Practice Management Advice from the Experts
by Robert R. Edwab. 2003.
3. Dental Team Companion: Clinical Practice - 6 (Quintessentials of Dental Practice) by
Mabel Slater. 2009.
4. Medical and Dental Space Planning: A Comprehensive Guide to Design, Equipment, and
Clinical Procedures by Jain Malkin. 2002.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:

improvement.
committee

whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
PRACTICE MANAGEMENT & PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
1. Institution:
2. College:
Jazan University
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Credit hours
Practice Management &
Professional Conduct, 663
DEN
1
Dentistry
261 DEN
Al Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives
The course is designed:
 To provide the basic knowledge and skills of management and administration
 To strengthen students’ skills of clinical practice management
 To strengthen students
 To make student appreciate and be aware of different sides of business in health care
 To make the students competent enough to launch themselves after graduation in a
private health care market
This course was incorporated in recognition of the active change in the health care
market in Saudi Arabia and to launch students into this ever increasing private health
care practices. The course will give the students an outline of the health care system in
the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The course will also create awareness among the dental
students about the general principals of practice management in the clinics. The course
will take its basis from the present market scenario and the current rules and regulation
related to dental practice. Teaching would be aided with examples from real experiences
and events. Renowned speakers on the subject will be invited as guest for lectures on
the topic of professional conduct.
I.
Topics
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
No. of Weeks
Internship
Contact hours
Others
Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Practice Management & Professional Conduct | Page 343
III.
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Cognitive
Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor skills
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
V.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Method of
Assessment
Proportion
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:

improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
12 T H SEMESTER
SIXTH YEAR
CODE
TWELFTH SEMESTER
TH
PR
662 DEN
COURSE TITLE
Temporo Mandibular
Disorder (TMD) & Oro
Facial Pain
Community Dental
Practice
Pedodontics IV
Clinical Orthodontics II
Advanced Prosthodontics
II
Dental Implantology II
Comprehensive Care
Clinics II
Special Care Dentistry
TOTAL
8
612 MDS
632 PDS
634 PDS
636 PDS
642 SDS
644 SDS
664 DEN
CRH
COH
P-REQ
1
611 MDS
4
4
633 PDS
635 PDS
1
0
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
0
1
0
3
2
3
2
1
15
6
1
16
8
27
17
35
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
331 PDS
641 SDS
643 SDS
661 DEN
TEMPORO-MANDIBULAR-DISORDER & ORO-FACIAL PAIN
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
course
Jazan University
Temporo-Mandibular
Disorder & Oro-facial Pain,
612 MDS
2
Dentistry
Ashwin. J.
611 MDS
Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives
 Have knowledge of the patho-physiological processes involved in the cranio-facial
region.
 Understand the various social, psychological, physiological and pathological etiological
factors contributing to the development of TMD and oro-facial pain.
 Be able to plan management of TMD and oro-facial pain after collection of various
investigative reports.
 Be able to perform selective procedures and evaluate treatment and management
outcome of the patients suffering for TMD and oro-facial pain.
This course is taken in the fifth year in conjugation with courses in oral and maxillofacial
surgery. The course provides information on the diagnosis and the management of Temporomandibular disorders (TMD) and oro-facial pain. The course will consist of lectures and
seminars. The knowledge provided will consist of the role of the dentist in the management of
TMD and oro-facial pain. The knowledge gained will help dental clinicians in differential
diagnosis of oro-facial pain disorders. Topics will cover TMD disorders and oro-facial pain
disorders and the role of the dentist in managing these disorders.
Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Temporo-Mandibular-Disorder & Oro-Facial Pain | Page
- 347
I.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Topics
Pain-I
Pain-II
Trigeminal neuralgia
Mechanisms of control of pain
Anatomy of TMJ-I
Anatomy of TMJ-II
Myofascial Pain Dysfunction Syndrome
Internal derangement-I
Internal derangement-II
Ankylosis-I
Ankylosis-II
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
11
III.
No. of Weeks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
Contact hours
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Others
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
Identify trigeminal Lectures.
neuralgia, ankylosis, Clinical discussions
MPDS and internal & demonstrations
derangement
on patients/live
patients and learn models.
the
basic Clinical sessions
management.
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
- 348
b. Cognitive
Identify trigeminal
neuralgia, ankylosis ,
MPDS and internal
derangement
c. Interpersonal
Skills &
Responsibilities
Demonstrate ethical
relationship with
staff.
Should develop good
working relations
with his professional
colleagues.
Should wear a neat
apron/lab coat with
name tag.
Ensure proper
handling of patients
Students will be
taught to regularly
update their
knowledge on Oral
surgery by
increased use of
internet/web based
information
Should develop skills
for Identify
trigeminal neuralgia,
ankylosis, MPDS and
internal
derangement
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
e. Psychomotor
skills
V.
Lectures.
& demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on Oral
Surgery.
Registration of
online journals
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
staff.
with students
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Continuous
evaluation during
the course
Practical & Oral
exams
Proportion
- 349
40%
60%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Practical Exams
Written Exams
15%
15%
10%
20%
40%
D. Students support
1. Temporomandibular Disorders: An Evidenced-Based Approach to Diagnosis and
Treatment by Daniel M. Laskin, Charles S. Greene, and William L. Ph.D. Hylander. 2006.
2. Oro-facial Pain: Understanding Temporomandibular (Tmj Disorders) by Joseph A.
Gibilisco, Charles McNeill, and Harold T. Perry. 1994.
3. Oro-facial Pain and Headache by YairSharav and Rafael Benoliel. 2008.
4. Temporomandibular Joint Disorders: Diagnosis and Treatment by D.D.S. Mark H.
Friedman. 1985.
5. Joint and Muscle Dysfunction of the Temporomandibular Joint (Cells Tissues Organs
(Formerly ACTA Anatomical)) (v. 174, No. 1-2) by Arthur W. English. 2003.
6. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by Paul D. Robinson PhD BDS MBBS FDS, Thomas R. Pitt
Ford PhD BDS FDS, and Fraser McDonald PhD MSc BDS FDS MOrth. 2000.
7. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by J. A. Baart and H. S. Brand. 2008.
8. Manual of Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by A.P. Chitre. 2006.
9. Local anaesthesia in dentistry: Illustrated handbook on dental local anaesthesia by J
Haglund. 1978.
a. Accommodation
 Recovery Room
 Scrub Area
b.
Computing resources
c. Other resources
- 350

Computer system
 Viva
department:



improvement.
committee
whole.
Review:
fields.
skills.
- 351

Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
- 352
COMMUNITY DENTAL PRACTICE
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
d. Name(s) of faculty member(s) responsible for the
course
e.
f.
g.
h.
Jazan University
Dentistry
Community Dental Practice,
632 PDS
3
Dentistry
Dr Santosh Kumar
Tadakamandla
Dr Kaushik Sengupta
Dr Aadil Inamdar
6th Year/12th Semester
331 PDS
–
Shawajara Campus
B. Objectives







Apply knowledge of dental epidemiology in the planning, execution, and interpretation of
dental surveys
Plan an appropriate oral health promotion strategy for a particular community
Perform prophylactic measures such as fluoride mouthrinse, fluoride tablets and gels,
nutritional counselling, plaque control instruction, and dental sealants
Describe the processes and controversies associated with water fluoridation
Discuss the current trends in the provision and financing of dental care
Identify the various methods of dental manpower planning
Formulate arguments for the planning and provision of care in the community to meet oral
health needs
The Community Dental Practice course deals with the practical application of the concepts
taught in the Community Dentistry (331 PDS) course. This is undertaken in light of the oral
health problems prevalent among the people in the surrounding areas. A detailed review of
the clinical measures of oral health status and sociodental indicators and the factors
involved in the prevention and control of dental diseases is undertaken. Understanding of
the financing of dental care, assessment of community dental health needs, and manpower
planning and supply of dental services is fostered. Special emphasis is placed on dental
survey research and the provision of both clinical and health promotion experiences to
students in community-based settings. Students are presented with the opportunity to
Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Community Dental Practice | Page - 353
I.
apply the skills taught to the conduct of oral health surveys, health promotion activities,
and screening and preventive dental treatment.
Topics
No. of weeks
Lectures in community dental practice
– Measurement of oral diseases (dental caries,
periodontal diseases, and other common orofacial
disorders)
– Prevention of dental caries
– Prevention of periodontal diseases
– Prevention of oral cancer and other important oral
conditions
– Basic oral health surveys
– Financing of dental care
– The dental workforce and dental organizations
Survey project
Visits
– Primary health care settings and/or water fluoridation
plants
Camps (screening, health promotion, preventive
treatment) in
– The general population
– Schools and other educational facilities
– Institutions for the physically/mentally compromised
– Refugee camps and correctional facilities
Health promotion project
8
Contact
hours
8
1
1
4
4
4
16
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
8
–
24
Others
–
IV. Development of learning outcomes in different domains of learning
Skills
Description
Teaching strategies
Method of
Assessment
a. Knowledge
 Comprehensive
 Provision of
 Examinations
understanding and
extensive learning
 Continuous takeknowledge of
notes and
home assignments
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal
skills and
responsibilities
d. Communication,
information
technology, and
numerical skills
dental workforce,
dental
organizations, and
the financing of
dental care
 Comprehensive
understanding of
the implementation
of basic oral health
surveys
the modes of
prevention and
measurement of
common oral
diseases
materials to
students
 Seminars
 Guided reading
 Population surveys
 Quizzes
knowledge of the
measurement of
oral diseases in
estimating oral
disease burden of
specific populations
knowledge of basic
oral health surveys
in conducting
population-based
surveys
students
 Seminars from
students
 Survey
assignments from
students
report
 Survey report
report
 Taking
responsibilities
 Communicating
effectively with
patients and
colleagues
 Continuous
professional
development
materials
 Problem-based
learning exercises
 Seminar
presentations
 Group projects
 Continuous
assessment
 Written
examinations
 Evaluation of
seminar presentation
 Practical
implementation of
the knowledge
gained in
conducting oral
 Student-led
teaching materials
 Use of software
such as Microsoft
Excel and SPSS for
 Continuous
assessment
 Assessment of
software proficiency
 Written




e. Psychomotor
skills
V.
health surveys
Appropriate
computer skills for
compiling data
obtained from the
measurement of
oral diseases
Effective
communication
(both written and
oral)
Use of information
technology in
academics and
research
Presentation skills
–
compiling data
obtained from
population-based
surveys
Power Point and
other presentation
platforms and
methods
and
communication
technology
examinations
–
Assessment
Proportion
Task
Quiz I
40%
Quiz II
Survey project
Health promotion
project
60%
Practical exam
Final written exam
–
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
D. Student support
Faculty members are available for individual student consultations and academic advice
1. Oral Health Surveys: Basic Methods (fourth edition) by the World Health Organization.
World Health Organization, 1997.
3. Dentistry, Dental Practice, and the Community (sixth edition) by Brian A. Burt and
Steven A. Eklund. Saunders, 2005.
4. Primary Preventive Dentistry (seventh edition) by Norman O. Harris, Franklin GarciaGodoy, and Christine N. Nathe. Prentice Hall, 2008.
5. Concepts in Dental Public Health (second edition) by Jill Mason. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2010.
6. Developing Practice for Public Health and Health Promotion (third edition) by Jennie
Naidoo and Jane Wills. Bailliere Tindall, 2010.
8. Successful Preventive Dental Practices by Robert F. Barkley. BookSurge Publishing,
2010.
9. Dental Caries: The Disease and Its Clinical Management (second edition) by Ole
Fejerskov and Edwina Kidd. Wiley-Blackwell, 2008.
a. Accommodation
 Computers with CD/DVD ROM facility
 Software: Microsoft Office, SPSS, and Endnote
c. Other resources
department
assessments
teaching
Committee
Review
Planning
requirements
PEDODONTICS IV
1. Institution:
2. College:
b. Credit hours
e.
f.
g.
h.
JAZAN University
Pedodontics IV , 634 PDS
2 (1+1)
Dentistry
DR. GUNA SEKHAR
MADIRAJU
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
633 PDS
Al-Sawajrah Campus
B. Objectives







Be able to manage traumatic dental injuries in children.
Have knowledge on prevention of dental trauma in children.
Demonstrate an understanding of the role of a Pedodontist in managing a cleft lip &
palate child.
Have knowledge on the diagnosis and dental management of disabilities in children.
Demonstrate an understanding of the importance of comprehensive oral care in
children.
Have knowledge on recent advances in the field of Pedodontics.
Obtain a basic idea regarding the set-up of a Pedodontic clinic.
Pedodontics-IV course is the last course in Clinical Pedodontics and will be taught in 6th
Year/12th Semester and includes lectures on management and prevention of traumatic dental
injuries to primary & permanent dentition; clinical findings and dental management of disabled
children; Pedodontist role in cleft lip & palate management; Recent advances in Pedodontics;
and basic idea in setting up of a Pedodontic clinic. The Clinical sessions encompass extensive
clinical training on recording history of trauma including clinical findings & diagnostic tests;
emergency and restorative management of traumatised vital and non-vital primary/permanent
teeth; dental management/referral of medically compromised/disabled children and;
comprehensive oral care in children with emphasis on importance of follow-up visits.
Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Pedodontics IV | Page - 359
I.
Topics
No. of Weeks
Contact hours
Traumatic dental injuries in children: Classification,
Management & Prevention
Disabled children: Clinical findings & Dental management
6
6
Comprehensive oral care in children
1
1
1
Role of Pedodontist in Cleft lip & palate management
Recent advances in Pedodontics
3
3
1
1
Set-up of a Pedodontic clinic
1
1
TOTAL
1
13
13
Schedule for clinical sessions:
Topics
No. of Weeks
Record cases i.e., history of trauma, clinical examination, radiographs,
diagnosis & treatment planning
Management of children with traumatic dental injuries
-
Comprehensive oral care in children: Case presentation/discussion
-
-
Diagnosis and management/referral of disabled children
-
TOTAL
II.
Course Component
Lectures
III.
13
13
Tutorials
-
Practical/Clinics
(Credit hours)
13
Others
-
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Emergency and
Lectures.
restorative management
of dental trauma.
& demonstrations
Preventive measures to
on patients/live
traumatic dental injuries
models.
in children.
Clinical sessions
Dental management
under supervision
and/or referral of
by staff.
disabled children.
Case presentations
Pedodontist role in
by students.
managing cleft lip/palate
children.
Recent advances in
materials/techniques
used in Pedodontics.
Cognitive
Lectures.
treatment modality for
traumatised teeth in
& demonstrations
children.
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under supervision
by staff.
Case presentations
by students.
Clinical sessions
& Responsibilities
under regular
supervision by
Demonstrate ethical
staff.
Should develop good
Should wear a neat lab
coat with name tag &
ensure proper handling of
Pedodontic patients.
Communication
Regularly update their
List of web sites
Information
knowledge on various
providing
Technology &
advances in Pedodontics
knowledge on
Method of
Assessment
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous clinical
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ
exam
Final theory exam
Final clinical exam
Orals/viva-voce
Continuous
evaluation during
the course.
Continuous clinical
evaluation/
monitoring by the
Numerical skills
Psychomotor skills
by increased use of
internet/web based
information.
Demonstrate an
understanding of use of
information technology as
a means of
communication for data
collection & analysis for
self-directed learning.
presentations using
appropriate audio-visual
aids.
Develop skills for
emergency & restorative
management of dental
trauma in children.
Develop skills for
managing various
disabilities in children.
Pedodontics.
Registration of
online journals.
staff.
with students.
Audio-visual/live
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques
Exclusive training
on clinical
procedures
Step-by-step
evaluation of each
procedure by the
concerned staff.
Evaluation of quota
requirements.
Practical & Oral
exams
V.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
50%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
50%
Practical Exams
Orals/Viva-voce
Written Exams
D. Students support
DR. ARUN RATHNAM
DR. NIDHI MADAN
Proportion
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
20%
Pub Co. 1995
2000.
Miscellaneous:
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
CLINICAL ORTHODONTICS II
1. Institution:
2. College:
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Credit hours
Jazan University
Dentistry
Clinical Orthodontics II, 636
PDS
2
Dentistry
Dr Roby. P. Cherian
635 PDS
Al-Shawajrah Campus
B. Objectives









Be able to differentiate between limited and isolated problems that might be effectively
treated as part of a general practice from those requiring complex or comprehensive
orthodontic treatment.
Be able to inform the patients/parents regarding the nature and extent of the orthodontic
problem and provide the appropriate management and/or referral.
Understand the relationship between various dental specialities and must be able to
assume the role of primary treatment coordinator in integrating a multi-disciplinary
approach to the care of the adult patient.
Should have an understanding of combined surgical and orthodontic therapy and should be
able to explain to patients the procedures and their sequencing with orthodontic treatment.
That should include timing, preoperative orthodontics, surgical procedures, and
postoperative orthodontics and anticipated results.
Be able to consult and communicate with orthodontists and other specialists regarding
total dental care of patients.
Be able to contribute to multi-disciplinary approach of treatment.
Should have basic information about the temporomandibular joint and its relation to
temporomandibular disorders.
Should have an understanding of the new developments in the field of orthodontics such as
use of implants, onplants, distraction osteogenesis etc.
To help the students to resolve the problems and meet the challenges that are encountered
in the clinical practice through the participation in the discussion of carefully selected
orthodontic cases that demand from the students’ acquisition of critical thinking, problem
solving proficiency, self-directed learning strategies and team participation skills.
Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Clinical Orthodontics II | Page - 365










To familiarize the students with the appropriate procedures of orthodontic diagnosis and
treatment planning.
Be able to perform a full diagnostic set-up that includes intraoral and extraoral
photographs, impression for study models, cephalometric and intraoral radiographs.
Be able to assess the patient's profile and facial esthetics.
Be able to independently assess the orthodontic needs of a patient.
Be able to understand an orthodontic assessment and suggest possible outline treatment
plans.
Be able to provide an initial orthodontic diagnosis, explain and discuss the nature of
orthodontic treatment to the patient and parent.
Be able to diagnose and plan treatment under the supervision of a senior academic staff.
Be able to design and construct a removable appliance to treat simple malocclusion usually
performed by general dentists.
Be able to design, insert and adjust an active removable appliance to move a single tooth or
to correct a crossbite by movement of a segment of an arch.
Be able to recognize the fixed orthodontic appliance and its components.
This advanced course is the last of the three courses. This course aims mainly at the
application of all the diagnostic procedures taught in the Pre-Clinical Orthodontics and Clinical
Orthodontics - I courses. This course consists of lectures, problem-based tutorial sessions and a
clinical component. Familiarization with the procedure used by orthodontists in the correction
of severe malocclusion enables students to select those patients requiring referral. Limitations
of orthodontic treatment alone and coordination of a multi-disciplinary team in treatment of
complicated cases are discussed. Emphasis is given to diagnosis of difficult cases and the
training of dental/medical consultation and referral system.





Students will be participating in problem-based tutorial sessions to analyze the orthodontic
cases chosen to cover the following topics:
Orthodontic diagnosis and treatment planning of Class I, II and III malocclusion.
Orthodontic treatment of patients with medical disorders.
Early orthodontic treatment.
Management of dentofacial skeletal problems (A-P / Vertical / Transverse).
Assessment of patients for orthognathic surgery and growth modification.
This method of learning involves an active participation of the students in their learning
through generating hypotheses to explain the problems under discussion, contributing
resources and knowledge to the group, and demonstrating the ability to understand and apply
the available evidence to analyze the case.
The clinical component emphasizes diagnosis and treatment planning for different types
of malocclusion besides carrying out treatment procedures on patients in the orthodontic clinic.
Each student is required to treat a simple case usually treated by the general dentist during the
course. The students are then required to present their treated cases with pre- and posttreatment records to their fellow colleagues and the orthodontic faculty. The course consists of:



Lecture (One hour)
Tutorial (One hour)
Clinical (Three hours)
I.
S.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Topics
Lectures
Adjunctive Orthodontic treatment
Adult Orthodontics
Surgical Orthodontics
Minor surgical procedures in Orthodontics
Cleft lip and palate
TMJ and TMD disorders
Recent advances in Orthodontics
Tutorials
Problem based learning-I
Class I non-skeletal
Problem based learning-II
Class I skeletal
Problem based learning-III
Class II non-skeletal
Problem based learning-IV
Class II skeletal
Problem based learning-V
Class III non-skeletal
Problem based learning-VI
Class III skeletal
Clinical
Introduction to Diagnosis with diagnostic aids &
Treatment planning
Case History, Clinical examination, Impression,
Photographs & Radiographs
Cephalometric Tracing and Analysis
Model Analysis
Diagnosis and Formulation of a treatment plan
Designing and Fabrication of the Removable
Appliance
Delivery of Appliance & post-insertion instructions
Fixed appliance Demonstration
Case Presentations
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
No. of Weeks
Contact hours
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
6
3
3
6
1
3
1
1
3
Internship
3
3
9
Others
7
6
III.
39
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
a. Knowledge
•Special considerations in
Lectures
treatment of adults
•Major & minor surgical
Problem-based
procedures
tutorials
•New developments in
Orthodontics
Discussions with
•Management of cleft lip and
students
palate patients
•Limitations of orthodontic
Demonstrations,
treatment alone and special
audio-visual aids
problems
& study models
b. Cognitive
c. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
•Diagnosis & treatment
planning of different kinds of
skeletal & non-skeletal
malocclusion
•Diagnosis of a patient by
interpretation of case history,
clinical examination &
diagnostic records collected &
etiologic factors for this
particular malocclusion
•Formulation of a treatment
plan for the patient & design an
appropriate removable
mechanotherapy
Recognition of basic elements of
fixed orthodontic appliances
Problem-based
tutorials
•Should follow proper protocol
for regular attendance.
•Should develop good working
Clinical sessions
under
supervision by
staff.
Clinical
discussions &
demonstrations
on patients/live
models.
Clinical sessions
under
supervision by
staff.
Case
presentations by
students.
Method of
Assessment
2 MCQ quiz
exams
Mid-term
MCQ exam
Final theory
exam
Oral exam
Continuous
evaluation
by staff.
2 MCQ quiz
exams
Mid-term
MCQ &
clinical exam
Final theory
& clinical
exam
Spotters
Oral exam
Continuous
clinical
evaluation
by staff
Continuous
evaluation
during the
course.
d. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
e. Psychomotor
skills
relations with his professional
colleagues.
with name tag.
orthodontic patients.
• Enhance good student-patient
communication.
•Students will be taught to
knowledge on Orthodontics by
increased use of internet/web
based information.
•Develop clinical skills for
performing examination and
impression taking on patient
•Undertake a simple
cephalometric & model analysis
•Construct, insert & adjust a
simple removable appliance for
patient
List of web sites
providing
knowledge on
Orthodontics.
Continuous
monitoring
by the staff.
Audio-visual /
live / typhodont
demonstration of
different clinical
techniques.
Step-by-step
evaluation of
each
procedure by
concerned
staff
Discussions of
online journals.
Exclusive
training on
clinical
procedures.
Mid-term &
Final clinical
exams
Clinical sessions
under
supervision by
staff.
V.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
40%
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm(MCQ &
Clinical)
Continuous evaluation
60%
Practical Exams
Written Exams
Proportion
10%
10%
15%
5%
20%
40%
D. Students support
Essential books:
2006.
2. Mitchell L. An Introduction to Orthodontics. 3rd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press;
2002.
3. Singh G. Textbook of Orthodontics. 2nd ed. Jaypee Brothers; 2007.
Recommended books:
1. Graber T, Vanarsdall R, Vig K. Orthodontics: Current Principles and Techniques. 2005.
3. Bhalajhi SI. Orthodontics: The Art and Science. 1st ed. New Delhi: Arya (Medi)
Publishing House; 1997.
4. Burstone CJ, Marcotte MR. Problem solving in Orthodontics: Goal-oriented treatment
strategies. 2000.
5. Millett D, Welbury R. Clinical problem solving in Orthodontics and Paediatric Dentistry.
2005.
Reference books:
1. Nanda R. Temporary anchorage devices in Orthodontics. 2008.
2. William JK, Cook PA, Issacson KG, Thom AR. Fixed orthodontic appliances, principles and
practice. Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd. 1996.
3. Eliades T, Pandis N, Johnston LE Jr., White LW. Self-ligation in Orthodontics. 2009.
Journals:
1. Burden D, Mullally B, Sandler J. Orthodontic treatment of patients with medical
disorders. European Journal of Orthodontics. 2001;23(4):363-72.
2. Vlachos CC. Orthodontic treatment for the cleft palate patient. Seminars in Orthodontics.
1996;2(3):197-204.
3. Bailey LJ, Proffit WR, White R Jr. Assessment of patients for orthognathic surgery.
Seminars in Orthodontics. 2000;5(4):183-94.
4. Turley P. Managing the developing Class III malocclusion with palatal expansion and
facemask therapy. American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics.
2002;122(4):349-52.
Websites:
1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics e-edition: Text with
Continually Updated Online Reference. 2007.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:

improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.

skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
3. Institution:
4. College:
COMPREHENSIVE CARE CLINICS II
H. Course identification and general information
i. Course title and code
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
Credit hours
Jazan University
Comprehensive Care Clinics
II, 662 DEN
6
Dentistry
522 RDS & 661 DEN
- Shawajra campus
I. Objectives
 Design a comprehensive treatment plan, bearing in mind the specific needs of his
patient.


J.
Manage common clinical problems presented by dental patient at the primary care
level.
Recognize those conditions which lie outside the scope of general dental practice
and refer them to appropriate specialist for investigations and management.
Course description
This course features an intensive clinical emphasis with lectures, seminars, conferences,
and patient care experiences which will further develop the student’s expertise in the field
of comprehensive dentistry. Each student will learn how to visualize optimum dentistry from an
aesthetic, functional, biological and structural perspective. The curriculum exposes students to a
variety of comprehensive dentistry techniques and new modalities of treatment. Students will
treat a variety of patients under the close guidance of a diverse and experienced faculty.
In the theoretical part of the course, teachers present scenarios for clinical problems and
conduct discussions about these problems. It includes also lectures about principles of general
dental practice, quality assurance and medico-legal regulations and ethics in dental practice.
Upon completion of this course, students will have an increased understanding of the biological
basis of comprehensive dentistry theory and practice.
VI.
Topics
Introduction to the course
Practice-based research
Risk management in dental practice
Law and Ethics in Dentistry
No. of Weeks
1
2
1
1
Contact hours
16
32
16
16
Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Comprehensive Care Clinics II | Page - 373
Dentistry for Geriatric patients
Operative lecture
Endodontic lecture
Periodontics lecture
Prosthodontics lecture
Oral surgery lecture
Orthodontics lecture
VII.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
VIII.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Internship
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
Others
IX.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
f. Knowledge
g. Cognitive
h. Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
i. Communication
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
j. Psychomotor skills
X.
Assessment
Proportion
Task
60%
Procedure Points
Procedure Evaluation
Instructor’s Evaluation
Midterm
40%
Case presentation
Viva Voce
Final Theory Exam
Method of
Assessment
Proportion
15%
25%
10%
10%
20%
10%
10%
K. Students support
L. Learning resources
5. Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning: Principles, Design, Implementation by Michael
Cohen. 2008.
6. Essential Dental Handbook: Clinical and Practice Management Advice from the Experts
by Robert R. Edwab. 2003.
7. Dental Team Companion: Clinical Practice - 6 (Quintessentials of Dental Practice) by
Mabel Slater. 2009.
8. Medical and Dental Space Planning: A Comprehensive Guide to Design, Equipment, and
Clinical Procedures by Jain Malkin. 2002.
M. Facilities required
d. Accommodation
e. Computing resources
f. Other resources
N. Course evaluation and improvement processes
f.
Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:
g. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the
department:
h. Processes for improvement of teaching:

i.
j.
improvement.
Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:
committee
whole
Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:
Review:
fields.

skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.
SPECIAL CARE DENTISTRY
1. Institution:
2. College:
JAZAN University
b. Credit hours
f.
Special Care Dentistry,
664 DEN
1 (DIDACTIC)
Dentistry (BDS)
Dr. Guna Sekhar Madiraju
-
Al-Sawajrah Campus
B. Objectives
1. Be able to describe normal development and potential abnormalities in general growth,
craniofacial growth, growth of dento-alveolar complex and tooth eruption.
Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Special Care Dentistry | Page - 376
2. Understand the role and apply the knowledge of cell biology & genetic principles in the
diagnosis of oro-facial and dental conditions.
3. Be able to recognize syndromes where oro-facial features form significant component of
a syndrome.
4. Be able to deliver appropriate drug regimen for special care patients in dentistry.
5. Recognize the impact of disability on patients and their families.
6. Be able to communicate effectively with special needs people.
7. Recognize the role of multidisciplinary team in management of patients with special
health care needs.
8. Diagnose and design a comprehensive but feasible treatment plan, keeping in view of
the specific needs of special health care/disabled patients.
9. Be able to plan oral health promotion policies for special population groups.
Special care dentistry is concerned with the improvement of oral health in individuals and
groups in society who are unable to accept routine dental/oral care because of some physical,
intellectual, emotional, medical, mental, sensory or social impairment or a combination of these
factors. Special knowledge & skills including a multidisciplinary team approach is needed to
provide comprehensive oral care both in individuals and among special population groups. The
focus should be on the provision of oral care rather than on the specific dental procedures.
Special care dentistry is one of the advanced courses given in the 6th Year | 12th Semester. It is
a didactic only course with 1 credit hour/week and provides knowledge required to understand
the concepts of disability, impairment and oral health related to special care people including
assessment/diagnosis, formulation of a feasible treatment plan to deliver preventive &
comprehensive oral care in special needs people attending comprehensive care clinics II and
also individuals/groups at community level.
I.
Topics
Biological sciences of relevance to special care dentistry
 Cell biology & microbiology
 Growth & development
 Oral & related systemic diseases
Pharmacology and therapeutics
Role of Behavioural sciences
Impairment, disability and oral health
 Definitions/Concepts
 Conditions leading to Impairment & disability
 Oral health in disability
Oral health care planning for the individual
No. of Weeks
2
2
1
2
2
Contact hours
 Assessment & Diagnosis
 Treatment planning & Prevention
 Behaviour management
Clinical Special Care dentistry
 Restorative care
 Periodontal care
 Endodontic care
 Removable & fixed prosthetic care
 Orthodontic care
 Oral medicine & Oral pathology
 Oral surgery
 Management of Medical emergencies
Oral health care and oral health promotion for specific
population groups
II.
Course Component
Lectures
Tutorials
III.
13
-
2
2
Internship
-
Others
IV.
Skills
Description
Teaching
strategies
Knowledge
Normal development and
potential abnormalities in
general growth, craniofacial
Lectures
growth, growth of dentoalveolar complex and tooth
Case based
eruption.
learning
Concepts of disability,
impairment and barriers
encountered in oral care.
Self-directed
learning
-
Method of
Assessment
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ exam
Final theory exam
Orals/viva-voce
Oral & dental manifestations
of specific conditions.
Appropriate drug regimen for
special care patients in
dentistry.
Relation between disability
and oral health & preventive
oral care.
Cognitive
Interpersonal &
Responsibilities
Development of services for
special population groups
including ethnic & refugee
groups etc. who are socially
excluded.
Recognize normal and
atypical/abnormal behaviour
patterns in adolescents/adults
with impairment and
disability.
Identify and assess the person
who requires special oral
health care.
Able to work effectively with
other health care
professionals & dental
specialities.
Lectures
Case based
learning
Self-directed
learning
2 MCQ quiz exams
Mid-term MCQ exam
Final theory exam
Orals/viva-voce
Interactive
sessions with
students
Understand the importance of
referral to other specialities as
appropriate.
Communication,
Information
Technology &
Numerical skills
Psychomotor
skills
V.
Consult and collaborate with
colleagues in other medical &
surgical specialities where
appropriate.
Use digital imaging devices
effectively.
Demonstrate positive and
proactive attitude to new
technology.
Apply the principles of
confidentiality relating to
written, electronic and digital
clinical records.
Develop skills to communicate
effectively with individuals
requiring special care.
Interactive
sessions with
students
Continuous
evaluation/monitoring
by the staff
Interactive
sessions with
students
Continuous
evaluation/
monitoring by the staff
Assessment
Proportion
40%
60%
Task
MCQ’s I
MCQ’s II
Midterm
Course Work
Oral Exams
Proportion
5%
5%
20%
10%
20%
Written Exams
40%
D. Students support
Recommended text books:
1. Special Care in Dentistry. Handbook of Oral Health care. Crispian Scully CBE,
Pedro Diz Dios, Navdeep Kumar. Churchill Livingstone.
2. A Clinical guide to Special Care Dentistry. Janice J Fiske, Dougall A, Donald .P.
Lewis. Publisher: British Dental Journal.
3. Special Care Dentistry. Fiske J, Raifque S, Boyle C, Burke M, Dickinson C.
Quintessence Publishing Co. Limited, London, UK.
a. Accommodation
c. Other resources
department:



improvement.
committee
whole
Review:
fields.
skills.
Planning:
requirements.
strategies.
strategies.

Course Specifications | 1st Semester | Page

Transcription

Similar documents

SUNDAYS FROM 10:00AM

TLC-Dec15-Ronit-3

Dental Savings Program - Pure Design Dentistry

HONORS CONVOCATION TO FEATURE FAMU

The beauty of the dentistry`s tools in the 19 century

to this!

Us Friendly Online Casino Guide Card Game In Casino Royale

Life Connection - The Reconnection

Referral Form - Longwood House Dental Care

Prepared by: Assoc. Prof. Dr Bahaman Abu Samah